559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface
For use with HC900 Hybrid Controller
User Guide
Doc. No.: 51-52-25-108
Revision: 5
Date: 9/03
Industrial Measurement and Control

Notices and Trademarks
Copyright 2003 by Honeywell

Revision 5 Sept. 2003
Warranty/Remedy
Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship. Contact
your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of
coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer's sole
remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is believed to be accurate
and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.
While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web site, it is up to the
customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.

Honeywell
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
HC900, 559 and 1042 are U.S. registered trademarks of Honeywell
Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
ii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

9/03
About This Document
Abstract
This manual describes the installation and operation of the 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interfaces.
References
The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this
publication.
Document Title Doc ID
HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide 51-52-25-107
Hybrid Control Designer User Guide 51-52-25-110
Hybrid Control Designer Function Block Reference Guide 51-52-25-109
HC900 Hybrid Controller Communications User Guide 51-52-25-111
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywells World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.
Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)
Corporate http://www.honeywell.com
Industrial Measurement and Control http://content.honeywell.com/imc/
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization Phone Number
United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

1-888-423-9883 Q&A Faxback
(TACFAQS)
1-800-525-7439 Service
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide iii
9/03
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol Definition
This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if

not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation

and literature. If present on a product, the user must consult the
appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more
information.
This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if

not avoided, may result in property damage.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a
potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms,
42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these
instructions could result in death or serious injury.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for

handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth
(green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the
source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded
to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local
electrical code requirements.
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment

shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with
national and local electrical code requirements.
iv 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

9/03
Contents
Contents
Symbol Definitions....................................................................................................... iv
Introduction ............................................................................................. 1
Overview.......................................................................................................................1
Whats in this guide ................................................................................................................1
Typical readers of this guide ..................................................................................................2
What you can do with the OI ..................................................................................................2
CE Conformity (Europe) ...............................................................................................2
Overview of Architecture ......................................................................... 3

Description of Components ..........................................................................................3
Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup................................................... 5
Specifications ...............................................................................................................5
Site Preparation............................................................................................................7
OI Mounting ..................................................................................................................7
Model 559 (Type 12) ..............................................................................................................7
Model 559 (Type 4) ..............................................................................................................13
Model 1042 ..........................................................................................................................14
Wiring..........................................................................................................................15
Power requirement...............................................................................................................15
Power supply mounting ........................................................................................................15
Connections .........................................................................................................................16
Noise Protection .........................................................................................................19
Startup ........................................................................................................................19
What to do if the OI has difficulty starting up ........................................................................19
Performing a cold start .........................................................................................................19
Keys and Displays Overview................................................................. 21

Overview of Keys........................................................................................................21
Standard Keys ............................................................................................................23
Overview ..............................................................................................................................23
Common Tasks Using Standard Keys .......................................................................24
User-assignable Keys.................................................................................................29
Keys F1-F4...........................................................................................................................29
Display Group keys 1-5 (Model 1042, keys 1- 8) .................................................................29
Relabeling Display Group Keys..................................................................................31
Overview of Displays ..................................................................................................33
Display areas defined...........................................................................................................33
Display organization .............................................................................................................34
Standard and user-assignable displays ...............................................................................35
User-assignable displays .....................................................................................................36
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide v

9/03
Contents
Main Menu ............................................................................................ 41

Overview.....................................................................................................................41
What is the Main Menu?.......................................................................................................41
Main menu tree ....................................................................................................................42
Recipes ................................................................................................. 46
Access..................................................................................................................................46
Description ...........................................................................................................................46
Procedure.............................................................................................................................46
Edit/View recipe ...................................................................................................................46
Load recipe ..........................................................................................................................47
Setpoint Programmers .......................................................................... 48

Overview.....................................................................................................................48
Access..................................................................................................................................48
Description ...........................................................................................................................48
Setpoint Program Setup .............................................................................................49
Access..................................................................................................................................49
Select program ...........................................................................................................50
Edit program ...............................................................................................................51
Edit segments.............................................................................................................53
Edit Segment Events............................................................................................................53
Save program .............................................................................................................54
Setpoint Program Operation.......................................................................................55
Overview ..............................................................................................................................55
Whats in this section ...........................................................................................................55
Security ................................................................................................................................55
SPP operation - Model 1042 ......................................................................................56
SPP operation - Model 559 ........................................................................................58
SPP operate popup menu - Model 559 ................................................................................60
View program events - Model 559........................................................................................61
View program details - Model 559........................................................................................62
Load program .............................................................................................................62
Edit segments.............................................................................................................65
Setpoint Scheduler ................................................................................ 67

Overview.....................................................................................................................67
Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042 ......................................................68
Access..................................................................................................................................68
Edit schedule ..............................................................................................................69
Edit segments.............................................................................................................70
Edit setpoints ..............................................................................................................71
Edit segment events ...................................................................................................72
Edit guarantee hold ....................................................................................................73
vi 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

9/03
Contents
Save schedule ............................................................................................................74

Edit guarantee hold limits .....................................................................................................76
Setpoint Schedule Operation .....................................................................................77
Overview ..............................................................................................................................77
Security ................................................................................................................................77
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042.................................................................78
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559...................................................................80
Scheduler popup menu - Model 559 ....................................................................................82
Load schedule ............................................................................................................84
View schedule events.................................................................................................86
View auxiliary data......................................................................................................87
Edit segments.............................................................................................................88
Sequencers ........................................................................................... 89
Overview.....................................................................................................................89
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042....................................................................90
Overview ..............................................................................................................................90
Access..................................................................................................................................90
Edit Sequence......................................................................................................................91
Edit Steps.............................................................................................................................92
Edit Step Details...................................................................................................................93
View Step Details .................................................................................................................94
View Sequence Outputs.......................................................................................................95
Select State..........................................................................................................................96
Save Sequence ..........................................................................................................97
Sequencer Operation .................................................................................................98
Overview ..............................................................................................................................98
Security ................................................................................................................................98
Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 ...........................................................................99
Access..................................................................................................................................99
Sequencer Operation Display ..............................................................................................99
Sequencer Operation - Model 559 ...........................................................................100
Access................................................................................................................................100
Sequencer Operation Display ............................................................................................100
Sequencer popup menu - Model 559 .................................................................................101
Load Sequencer .......................................................................................................102
View/Edit Sequence .................................................................................................103
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details .....................................................................................104
Loops .................................................................................................. 105

Overview...................................................................................................................105
Loop modes .......................................................................................................................105
Whats in this section................................................................................................106
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide vii
9/03
Contents
Common Loop Tasks ...............................................................................................106

Loop Setup ...............................................................................................................108
Access................................................................................................................................108
Select loop .........................................................................................................................108
Loop menu .........................................................................................................................108
Loop trend ..........................................................................................................................109
Loop Autotune....................................................................................................................110
Loop tune constants...........................................................................................................111
Loop control setup..............................................................................................................112
Carbon parameters ............................................................................................................113
Loop alarm setpoints ..........................................................................................................114
Loop limits ..........................................................................................................................115
High Output Limiting...........................................................................................................116
Loop Operation Displays ..........................................................................................117
Overview ............................................................................................................................117
Loop modes (all loop displays)...........................................................................................117
Loop summary ...................................................................................................................118
Loop control .......................................................................................................................119
Multiloop faceplate .............................................................................................................120
1 loop numeric....................................................................................................................121
Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen ......................................................................122
Loop Tune Constants display.............................................................................................123
A/M bias .............................................................................................................................124
Summary Displays .............................................................................. 125

Analog Input Summary .............................................................................................125
Access................................................................................................................................125
Description .........................................................................................................................125
Analog Output Summary ..........................................................................................126
Access................................................................................................................................126
Description .........................................................................................................................126
Digital Input Summary ..............................................................................................126
Access................................................................................................................................126
Description .........................................................................................................................126
Digital Output Summary ...........................................................................................127
Access................................................................................................................................127
Description .........................................................................................................................127
Variable Summary ....................................................................................................128
Access................................................................................................................................128
Description .........................................................................................................................128
Alarms ................................................................................................. 131

Overview...................................................................................................................131
Access................................................................................................................................131
Alarms defined ...................................................................................................................131
Alarm indication ........................................................................................................131
Investigating alarms ...........................................................................................................131
Alarm Summary........................................................................................................132
Access................................................................................................................................132
Description .........................................................................................................................132
Alarm Group .............................................................................................................133
Access................................................................................................................................133
viii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5
9/03
Contents
Description .........................................................................................................................133
Acknowledging alarms .......................................................................................................133
Manual vs. auto acknowledge ............................................................................................133
Alarm Detail ..............................................................................................................134
Access................................................................................................................................134
Events ................................................................................................. 135

Event Summary ........................................................................................................135
Access................................................................................................................................135
Description .........................................................................................................................135
Diagnostics.......................................................................................... 136
Overview...................................................................................................................136
Access................................................................................................................................136
Diagnostic types.................................................................................................................136
Controller diagnostics ...............................................................................................137
I/O module diagnostics .............................................................................................141
Access................................................................................................................................141
Description .........................................................................................................................141
I/O module error status ......................................................................................................143
Bad module details.............................................................................................................145
Bad channel details ............................................................................................................146
I/O Module Diagnostics physical details...................................................................147
Access................................................................................................................................147
Panel diagnostic log .................................................................................................148
Communication Ports diagnostics ............................................................................149
Access................................................................................................................................149
Overview ............................................................................................................................149
RS-232 Config Port/RS-485 OI Port...................................................................................150
Network Port ......................................................................................................................151
Expansion I/O Port .............................................................................................................152
Unit Setup ........................................................................................... 153

Access................................................................................................................................153
Description .........................................................................................................................153
Controller Status.......................................................................................................154
Set Mode ..................................................................................................................154
Set Time and Date....................................................................................................156
Set Security/Review Security ...................................................................................156
Accessing a secured area ..................................................................................................157
Set Language ...........................................................................................................160
Communications.......................................................................................................161
Access................................................................................................................................161
Overview ............................................................................................................................161
RS-232 Port .......................................................................................................................162
RS-485 OI port ...................................................................................................................165
Network Port ......................................................................................................................166
Expansion I/O Port .............................................................................................................172
Modbus Slave Devices display...........................................................................................173
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide ix

9/03
Contents
Modbus Slave Details display ............................................................................................173

Troubleshooting a Comm Quality problem .........................................................................175
Troubleshooting Data Link Errors.......................................................................................175
File Name Selection .................................................................................................175
Self Tests..................................................................................................................177
Calibrate AI...............................................................................................................178
Overview ............................................................................................................................178
Calibration equipment ........................................................................................................178
Calibrate AI menu ..............................................................................................................179
Set Controller Mode ...........................................................................................................179
Calibrate AI channel...........................................................................................................180
Example of AI calibration....................................................................................................181
Calibrate CJ temperature ...................................................................................................182
Example of CJ calibration...................................................................................................183
Restore AI factory calibration .............................................................................................184
Restore CJ factory calibration ............................................................................................185
Calibrate AO .............................................................................................................185
Overview ............................................................................................................................185
Calibrate AO menu.............................................................................................................185
Set Controller Mode ...........................................................................................................186
Calibrate AO channel .........................................................................................................187
Example of AO calibration..................................................................................................188
Restore AO factory calibration ...........................................................................................189
Calibrate Motor .........................................................................................................190
Introduction ........................................................................................................................190
Motor Setup........................................................................................................................191
Motor Calibration................................................................................................................192
Calibration Status Information ............................................................................................192
Cancel Calibration..............................................................................................................192
Calibration Errors ...............................................................................................................192
Auto Calibration Procedure ................................................................................................194
Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure.......................................................................................195
Hand Calibration Procedure ...............................................................................................197
Display brightness ....................................................................................................199
Disk Utilities......................................................................................... 201

Overview...................................................................................................................201
Access................................................................................................................................201
Description .........................................................................................................................201
Disk insertion......................................................................................................................201
Load ...................................................................................................................................201
Store ..................................................................................................................................201
List disk files .............................................................................................................202
Anatomy of filenames.........................................................................................................202
Load/store SP profiles ..............................................................................................203
Description .........................................................................................................................203
Load/store SP schedules .........................................................................................205
Description .........................................................................................................................205
Load/Store sequences..............................................................................................207
Load/store recipes ....................................................................................................209
Description .........................................................................................................................209
x 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

9/03
Contents
Load configuration ....................................................................................................211

Store configuration ...................................................................................................214
Format disk...............................................................................................................215
Set Controller Mode..................................................................................................216
Data Storage ....................................................................................... 219

Overview...................................................................................................................219
Data storage overall process..............................................................................................219
What can be stored ............................................................................................................219
What can not be stored ......................................................................................................220
Storage capacity [floppy and Zip(1042 only)] .....................................................................220
Storage capacity (floppy disk) ............................................................................................220
Calculating storage capacity (floppy disk) ..........................................................................220
Example storage capacity calculation (floppy disk) ............................................................221
Zip drives (On Model 1042 only) ........................................................................................221
Rollover ..............................................................................................................................222
Storage modes...................................................................................................................223
Storage intervals ................................................................................................................223
How storage is controlled ...................................................................................................224
Three levels of control ........................................................................................................225
Example of trend enabling..................................................................................................226
Example of alarm/event enabling .......................................................................................226
Example of point log enabling ............................................................................................227
How to analyze stored data................................................................................................227
Data Storage Operation............................................................................................228
Access................................................................................................................................228
Typical data storage tasks..................................................................................................228
View storage status............................................................................................................229
Storage controls .................................................................................................................231
Initialize storage disk ..........................................................................................................232
Load storage settings .........................................................................................................233
View storage settings .........................................................................................................234
Start new storage settings..................................................................................................235
Store storage settings ........................................................................................................236
Status line storage indicator ...............................................................................................236
Log Off/Log On.................................................................................... 237

Access................................................................................................................................237
Description .........................................................................................................................237
Other Operating Displays .................................................................... 239

Overview...................................................................................................................239
Pushbuttons..............................................................................................................239
Description .........................................................................................................................239
4-Selector Switch......................................................................................................240
Device Control ..........................................................................................................241
Change the current delay times .........................................................................................242
Hand/Off/Auto Switch ...............................................................................................243
Set the HOA switch state ...................................................................................................243
Stage ........................................................................................................................244
Edit stage display ...............................................................................................................245
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xi

9/03
Contents
Ramp ........................................................................................................................246
Edit ramp display................................................................................................................247
Edit ramp display................................................................................................................248
Alternator ..................................................................................................................249
Edit alternator display.........................................................................................................251
Edit output sequence .........................................................................................................252
Monitoring Displays ............................................................................. 253

Overview...................................................................................................................253
Whats in this section .........................................................................................................253
Trend Displays..........................................................................................................254
Log Scale Trending ............................................................................................................255
Trend menu........................................................................................................................256
Alternate method of scrolling..............................................................................................256
Sampling rates of trends ....................................................................................................257
Example of trend zoom ......................................................................................................257
Bar Graph Displays ..................................................................................................258
Panel Displays..........................................................................................................259
Single point rotating panel..................................................................................................259
Interacting with panel display .............................................................................................259
4-point panel ......................................................................................................................260
Multi-point panel.................................................................................................................261
Panel meter........................................................................................................................261
Overview ............................................................................................................................262
Other Displays ..........................................................................................................263
Help....................................................................................................................................263
Maintenance........................................................................................ 265
Overview...................................................................................................................265
Parts .........................................................................................................................265
Messages............................................................................................ 267
Overview...................................................................................................................267
Appendix ............................................................................................. 277

Security Bypass Procedure ......................................................................................277
Overview ............................................................................................................................277
Bypass procedure ..............................................................................................................277
Index ................................................................................................... 279
Sales and Service ............................................................................... 283
xii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5
9/03
Contents
Tables
Table 1 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................5
Table 2 Mounting .......................................................................................................................................................14
Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting..............................................................................................................15
Table 4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................16
Table 5 Standard key actions......................................................................................................................................23
Table 6 Tasks using standard keys .............................................................................................................................24
Table 7 User-assignable key actions...........................................................................................................................30
Table 8 Display areas defined details .........................................................................................................................33
Table 9 User-assignable displays................................................................................................................................37
Table 10 Top level functions of main menu ...............................................................................................................41
Table 11 Main menu tree............................................................................................................................................42
Table 12 Recipe edit/view details...............................................................................................................................46
Table 13 SPP inputs and current state ........................................................................................................................48
Table 14 Edit program details.....................................................................................................................................51
Table 15 Edit segment details.....................................................................................................................................53
Table 16 Save Program details ...................................................................................................................................54
Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042 ............................................................................................................................56
Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559 ...................................................................................................................58
Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559..................................................................................................................60
Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state ................................................................................................61
Table 21 View program events details - Model 559...................................................................................................61
Table 22 View program details- Model 559 ...............................................................................................................62
Table 23 Program load details ....................................................................................................................................62
Table 24 Edit segments details ...................................................................................................................................65
Table 25 SPS inputs and current state ........................................................................................................................67
Table 26 Edit schedule details ....................................................................................................................................69
Table 27 Edit segment details.....................................................................................................................................70
Table 28 Edit setpoints details ....................................................................................................................................71
Table 29 Edit segment events details..........................................................................................................................72
Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details...........................................................................................................................73
Table 31 Schedule save details ...................................................................................................................................74
Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details.................................................................................................................76
Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042 .......................................................................................78
Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559.........................................................................................80
Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559..............................................................................................82
Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state ................................................................................................83
Table 37 Schedule load details ...................................................................................................................................84
Table 38 View schedule events details .......................................................................................................................86
Table 39 View auxiliary data details ..........................................................................................................................87
Table 40 Edit segments details ...................................................................................................................................88
Table 41 Edit Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................91
Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps.....................................................................................................................................92
Table 43 Edit Step Details ..........................................................................................................................................93
Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example)..................................................................................94
Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example).................................................................................95
Table 46 Select State ..................................................................................................................................................96
Table 47 Sequence save details ..................................................................................................................................97
Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 .............................................................................................................99
Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559 .............................................................................................................100
Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559...........................................................................................101
Table 51 Schedule load details .................................................................................................................................102
Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps...................................................................................................................................103
Table 53 Edit Step Details ........................................................................................................................................104
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xiii
9/03
Contents
Table 54 Loop modes ...............................................................................................................................................105

Table 55 Common loop tasks ...................................................................................................................................106
Table 56 Loop menu visibility..................................................................................................................................108
Table 57 Details of single loop trend........................................................................................................................109
Table 58 Details of loop auto tune (not listed in order of appearance).....................................................................110
Table 59 Details of loop tune constants....................................................................................................................111
Table 60 Details of loop control setup......................................................................................................................112
Table 61 Details of carbon loop................................................................................................................................113
Table 62 Details of loop alarm setpoints ..................................................................................................................114
Table 63 Details of loop limits .................................................................................................................................115
Table 64 Details of high output limiting...................................................................................................................116
Table 65 Loop modes ...............................................................................................................................................117
Table 66 Details of loop summary............................................................................................................................118
Table 67 Loop control details ...................................................................................................................................119
Table 68 Multiloop faceplate details ........................................................................................................................120
Table 69 Single loop numeric details .......................................................................................................................121
Table 70 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen .............................................................................122
Table 71 Details of loop tune constants display .......................................................................................................123
Table 72 A/M bias details.........................................................................................................................................124
Table 73 Analog Input Summary details ...................................................................................................................125
Table 74 Analog Output Summary details ................................................................................................................126
Table 75 Digital Input Summary details....................................................................................................................126
Table 76 Digital Output Summary details .................................................................................................................127
Table 77 Variable summary details ..........................................................................................................................128
Table 78 Details of alarm summary..........................................................................................................................132
Table 79 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages .............................................................................137
Table 80 I/O module diagnostics details...................................................................................................................142
Table 81 I/O Module Error Statuses .........................................................................................................................143
Table 82 Bad module details .....................................................................................................................................145
Table 83 Bad Channel details ....................................................................................................................................146
Table 84 I/O module diagnostic details ....................................................................................................................147
Table 85 RS-232 Config Port/RS-485 OI Port diagnostics and statuses ..................................................................150
Table 86 Network Port diagnostics...........................................................................................................................151
Table 87 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics .................................................................................................................152
Table 88 Controller status details .............................................................................................................................154
Table 89 Set mode details.........................................................................................................................................154
Table 90 Controller modes defined ...........................................................................................................................155
Table 91 Set time and date details .............................................................................................................................156
Table 92 Set security details .....................................................................................................................................156
Table 93 Displays and functions that can be secured ...............................................................................................158
Table 94 Set language details ...................................................................................................................................160
Table 95 RS-232 Port diagnostic and status information ..........................................................................................162
Table 96 RS-232 Port setup parameters ....................................................................................................................163
Table 97 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the RS-232 Port ................................................................164
Table 98 RS-485 OI port details ...............................................................................................................................165
Table 99 Network port details ..................................................................................................................................166
Table 100 View network host details ........................................................................................................................167
Table 101 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators ........................................................................................168
Table 102 View peer connection details....................................................................................................................168
Table 103 View network peer statistics details..........................................................................................................169
Table 104 Peer Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators ........................................................................................170
Table 105 Expansion I/O Port details ........................................................................................................................172
Table 106 Modbus Slave Devices display.................................................................................................................173
Table 107 Modbus Slave Details display ..................................................................................................................174
Table 108 File name selection details.......................................................................................................................176
xiv 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5
9/03
Contents
Table 109 Self tests details .......................................................................................................................................177

Table 110 Calibrate AI channel details.....................................................................................................................180
Table 111 Example of AI calibration .......................................................................................................................181
Table 112 Calibrate CJ temp details .........................................................................................................................182
Table 113 Example of CJ calibration ........................................................................................................................183
Table 114 Restore AI factory calibration details ......................................................................................................184
Table 115 Restore CJ factory calibration details ......................................................................................................185
Table 116 Calibrate AO channel details ...................................................................................................................187
Table 117 Example of AO calibration.......................................................................................................................188
Table 118 Restore AO factory calibration details.....................................................................................................189
Table 119 Motor Setup Procedure .................................................................................................................................191
Table 120 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure .................................................................................................................192
Table 121 Calibration Errors .....................................................................................................................................193
Table 122 Auto Calibration Procedure ..........................................................................................................................194
Table 123 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure....................................................................................................................195
Table 124 Hand Calibration Procedure ...........................................................................................................................197
Table 125 List disk files details ................................................................................................................................202
Table 126 Load/store profiles details........................................................................................................................204
Table 127 Load/store schedules details ....................................................................................................................206
Table 128 Load/store sequence details .....................................................................................................................207
Table 129 Load/store recipes details ........................................................................................................................209
Table 130 Load configuration procedure..................................................................................................................211
Table 131 Store configuration details.......................................................................................................................214
Table 132 Format disk details...................................................................................................................................215
Table 133 Set mode details.......................................................................................................................................216
Table 134 Controller modes defined ........................................................................................................................216
Table 135 Data storage point factors ........................................................................................................................220
Table 136 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only ............................................................................................222
Table 137 Storage modes .........................................................................................................................................223
Table 138 View storage status details.......................................................................................................................229
Table 139 Storage controls details............................................................................................................................231
Table 140 View storage setting details .....................................................................................................................234
Table 141 Log off display details .............................................................................................................................237
Table 142 Pushbutton details....................................................................................................................................239
Table 143 Four selector switch details .....................................................................................................................240
Table 144 Device control display details..................................................................................................................241
Table 145 Edit device display details .......................................................................................................................242
Table 146 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details......................................................................................................243
Table 147 Set HOA switch state display details.......................................................................................................243
Table 148 Stage operator display details ..................................................................................................................244
Table 149 Edit stage display details .........................................................................................................................245
Table 150 Ramp operator display details..................................................................................................................246
Table 151 Edit ramp sub-menu display details.........................................................................................................247
Table 152 Edit ramp display details .........................................................................................................................248
Table 153 Alternator operator display details...........................................................................................................250
Table 154 Edit alternator display details ..................................................................................................................251
Table 155 Edit output sequence display details ........................................................................................................252
Table 156 Example of trend details ..........................................................................................................................255
Table 157 Trend menu..............................................................................................................................................256
Table 158 Sampling rates of trends ..........................................................................................................................257
Table 159 Bar graph display details .........................................................................................................................258
Table 160 4-point panel details.................................................................................................................................260
Table 161 Multi-point panel details..........................................................................................................................261
Table 162 Overview details ......................................................................................................................................262
Table 163 Parts .........................................................................................................................................................265
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xv

9/03
Contents
Table 164 Messages..................................................................................................................................................267
xvi 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5
9/03
Contents
Figures
Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface.............................................................................................................................1
Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface...............................................................................................................................1
Figure 3 1042 operator interface...................................................................................................................................1
Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture ....................................................................................................4
Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12.....................................................................8
Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12.......................................................................................9
Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12....................................................................................10
Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12.....................................................................11
Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12 ......................................................................................12
Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout.....................................................................................13
Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042 ..................................................................................................14
Figure 12 Startup display............................................................................................................................................19
Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface ................................................................................................................21
Figure 14 View of 1042 OI.........................................................................................................................................22
Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions...................................................................................................32
Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions .....................................................................................32
Figure 17 Display areas defined .................................................................................................................................33
Figure 18 Display organization ..................................................................................................................................35
Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042 ...........................................................................................54
Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042 ......................................................................................................................56
Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559 .............................................................................................................58
Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559 .......................................................................................................60
Figure 23 View program events - Model 559.............................................................................................................61
Figure 24 View program details - Model 559.............................................................................................................62
Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042 ........................................................63
Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042................................................................64
Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule ....................................................................................................................74
Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042 .................................................................................................78
Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559 ...................................................................................................80
Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559..............................................................................................82
Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number ..............................................................................84
Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list .....................................................................................85
Figure 33 View schedule events .................................................................................................................................86
Figure 34 View auxiliary data ....................................................................................................................................87
Figure 35 Edit segments .............................................................................................................................................88
Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example) .............................................................................................92
Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042 ..............................................................................................99
Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559 ..............................................................................................100
Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559 ...........................................................................................101
Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps .................................................................................................................................103
Figure 41 IMAN loop mode .....................................................................................................................................105
Figure 42 Single loop trend ......................................................................................................................................109
Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only)...............................................120
Figure 44 Single loop numeric .................................................................................................................................121
Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen............................................................................................122
Figure 46 A/M bias...................................................................................................................................................124
Figure 47 Alarm group display.................................................................................................................................133
Figure 48 Event summary.........................................................................................................................................135
Figure 49 Controller diagnostics ..............................................................................................................................137
Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view .............................................................................................141
Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view ...............................................................................................141
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xvii
9/03
Contents
Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log .................................................................................................................................148

Figure 53 Communication ports ................................................................................................................................149
Figure 54 Communications ports display .................................................................................................................161
Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*) ......................................................................................167
Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections ............................................................................................172
Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections ..............................................................................................172
Figure 58 File name selection...................................................................................................................................176
Figure 59 Self tests ...................................................................................................................................................177
Figure 60 Brightness display ....................................................................................................................................199
Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer ...................................................203
Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler...................................................................205
Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer ................................................................207
Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage......................................................................................................224
Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown.........................................................................................225
Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions..............................................................................................................226
Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions ...................................................................................................226
Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions.........................................................................................................227
Figure 69 View storage status...................................................................................................................................229
Figure 70 Storage controls........................................................................................................................................231
Figure 71 Initialize storage disk ...............................................................................................................................232
Figure 72 Load storage settings................................................................................................................................233
Figure 73 View storage settings ...............................................................................................................................234
Figure 74 Start new storage settings .........................................................................................................................235
Figure 75 Store storage settings................................................................................................................................236
Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys .......................................................................................................239
Figure 77 Four selector switch display .....................................................................................................................240
Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu.............................................................................................................240
Figure 79 Device control display..............................................................................................................................241
Figure 80 Edit device display ...................................................................................................................................242
Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display..................................................................................................................243
Figure 82 Stage operator display ..............................................................................................................................244
Figure 83 Ramp operator display .............................................................................................................................246
Figure 84 Alternator operator displays .....................................................................................................................249
Figure 85 Trend displays ..........................................................................................................................................254
Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom ........................................................................................................................257
Figure 87 Bar graph displays....................................................................................................................................258
Figure 88 Panel display ............................................................................................................................................259
Figure 89 4-point panel display ................................................................................................................................260
Figure 90 Multi-point panel display .........................................................................................................................261
Figure 91 Panel meter...............................................................................................................................................261
Figure 92 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................262
Figure 93 Help (messages) display...........................................................................................................................263
xviii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5
9/03
Introduction
Overview
Whats in this guide
This guide contains instructions on assembly, installation, wiring, and operation of the 559, and 1042
Series Operator Interface, shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.
F1 ? ALARM
F1 ? ALARM
F2
F2
F3
F3
F4 ESC
F4 ESC
KB
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface
Honeywell
F1 7 8 9
4 5 6
F2
1 2 3
F3
. 0 -
F4
? ALARM
ESC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3 1042 operator interface
Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide 1

9/03
Introduction
CE Conformity (Europe)
Typical readers of this guide

The typical users of this guide are:
the technician who installs the OI,
the engineer who configures the OI,
the operator who views/controls/monitors the process.
What you can do with the OI

The OI lets you perform these tasks:
Monitor and control a process.
Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Schedules, Sequences, and Unit Configurations.
Display various process data such as trends, alarms, diagnostics, setpoint profiles, and control loops.
Store process data to disk.
CE Conformity (Europe)
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council
Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of
this product with any other CE Mark Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio
and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters to the antenna(e).
In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may
have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic
emissions of this equipment.
2 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

9/03
Overview of Architecture
Description of Components
The OI is an optional component of a control system that contains:
Controller - As the heart of the system, this supports the following features.
Control loops
Analog and digital I/O
setpoint programming
setpoint scheduler
sequencer
recipe management
start/stop controls
function blocks
fast logic.
Hybrid Control Designer - An external PC based configuration tool that is used to graphically
configure the control strategies used by the Controller. It is also used to configure displays and function
keys on the OI. Control strategy configurations are downloaded from Hybrid Control Designer to the
Controller Module through communications or are loaded via the disk drive on the OI.
Operator Interface - Provides the operator interface for the Controller Module. It lets the operator
operate the process through various menus and displays,
monitor the process with trends and other graphical displays,
view and acknowledge alarms.
See Figure 4.

9/03
Overview of Architecture
Description of Components
Hybrid Control Designer

Control Strategy Configuration
Operator Interface Display Configuration
Operator Interface Function Key Configuration
Configuration Upload/Download
Test and Debug Control Strategies
Controller
Integrate Loops of Control with
Digital I/O
Setpoint Programming
Setpoint Scheduling
Sequencing
Alarm Processing
PID Control, Advanced Control,
and Auto-Tuning/Fuzzy Logic
Boolean Logic Via Function Blocks
Advanced Math Computations
Honeywell
7 8 9
F1
4 5 6
1 2 3
F2 0 _
? ALARM
Operator Interface - Example is Model 1042 View
F3
F4
Monitor and Control the Process
ESC
Load/Store/Run Recipes, Profiles, Data Storage Sets, Unit Configuration
Provide organized, visual presentation of information
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data Storage
Figure 4 Overview example of HC900 architecture

9/03
Specifications/Mounting/Wiring/Startup
Specifications
Table 1 Specifications
Design
CE Conformity (Europe) This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following
European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC,
the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive(s)
shall not be assumed. EN61326: Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and
Laboratory use. EMC requirements.
Installation Category Category II: Energy-consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation
(Overvoltage Category) (Multiloop Process Controller). Local level appliances, and Industrial Control
Equipment. (EN 61010-1)
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with occasional conductivity
caused by condensation. (ref. IEC 664-1)
EMC Classification Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment
Operator Interface Model 559

Components includes a Passive color LCD, 320 x 240 pixels ( VGA), full-function front panel keys,
3.5 1.44 MB diskette for file load and store functions, data storage, and an optional
QWERTY keyboard port.
Model 1042
Includes a TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels (Std VGA), full-function front
panel keys, standard 3.5 1.44 MB disk for file load and store functions, data storage,
QWERTY keyboard port, and an optional 100 mb Zip Drive.
The OI software provides a view into the controller, and allows the user to monitor and
control the process through predefined screens.
Power External 24 Vdc +/- 10% @ 1.0 amp minimum
Enclosure Material:
Model 559 Type 12: Structural Foam (Glass filled polycarbonate, UL 94V-1)
Model 559-Type 4: 304 StainlessSteel
Model 1042 Type 4: Bezel - 20 % glass filled polycarbonate (GE Lexan 3412R)
Chassis - Zinc plated steel with Yellow Chromate coating
Dimensions:
Model 559 Type 12:

Inches: 11.3 wide x 5.7 high x 5.4 deep
Millimeters: 288 wide x 144 high x 136 deep
Model 559-Type 4
Inches: 9.4 wide x 6.25 high x 5.5 deep (3.5" + 2" for Plug and Cabling)
Model 1042 Type 4

Inches: 15.8 wide x 9.8 high x 7.2 deep
System Interconnection Connected to controller through its dedicated RS485 port.

Maximum Distance Between Controller and OI: 601 meters (2000 feet.)
Cable Type: 2 conductor with shield, Belden 9271 or equivalent
Cable termination: 3 position connector at the controller end; screw type terminal strip
required at OI end

9/03
Specifications
Performance Average Screen Update Rate: 1.0 seconds

Average Data Entry Response Time: 1.5 seconds
Average Screen Call-up Time: 1.5 seconds
Product Classification Class I: Fixed, Permanently Connected, Industrial Control Equipment with protective
earthing (grounding). (EN 61010-1)
Mounting 559 Type 12: DIN (288 x 144) compatible panel mounted. May be panel mounted (IP
54, NEMA 12) in indoor non-hazardous locations.
559 Type 4: Panel mounted only
Model 1042 Type 4: Panel Mounted only
Display Model 559
Type: Color (passive LCD), 320 x 240 pixels resolution
Viewing Area: 119 mm wide x 90 mm high (4.7 inches wide x 3.5 inches high)
Model 1042
Type: TFT Active Matrix Color LCD, 640 x 480 pixels resolution
Viewing Area: 211 mm wide x 158 mm high (8.3 inches wide x 6.2 inches high)
Back-Light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CFL)

10K Hours to half brightness
Front Panel Model 559
Keys: Membrane22 keys
101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with front access (optional rear access on
559 Type 4 model)
Model 1042
Keys: Membrane37 keys
101-key AT Keyboard: Plug-in connector with rear access
Disk Drive Format: 3.5 inch, 1.44 megabytes
Model 559: Standard
Model 1041: Standard (120mb Zip Drive is optional)
Certifications Model 1042 CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements.
UL 3121-1, Process Control Equipment
FM Class I, Div. 2 groups A, B, C, D
Environmental Conditions
Ambient Operating Model 559 Type 12 Model 559 Type 4 Model 1042 Type 4
Temperature
32 F to 122 F 41 F to 126 F Floppy drive:
0 C to 50 C 5 C to 52 C 32 F to 122 F
0 C to 50 C
Zip drive:
32 F to 113 F
0 C to 45 C
Ambient Storage 4 F to 140 F 4 F to 140 F 4 F to 140 F

Temperature 20 C to 60 C 20 C to 60 C 20 C to 60 C
Ambient Operating 10 % to 90 % RH 10 % to 90 % RH 20 % to 80 % RH
Relative Humidity non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Ambient Storage 5 % to 95 % RH 5 % to 95 % RH 5 % to 90 % RH
Relative Humidity non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

9/03
Site Preparation
Site Preparation
The cable that connects the OI to the controller module contains low voltages. Keep the cable away from
high voltage wires that can cause interference.
OI Mounting
The Operator Interface comes available in three models: Model 559 (type 12 enclosure),
Model 559 (type 4 enclosure), and Model 1042. Refer to the section for your model.
Model 559 (Type 12)

The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be mounted the following ways.
Panel-mounted using brackets
Panel-mounted using screws
Whichever mounting method you choose, the supplied mounting kit contains the following hardware to
secure the Operator Interface case.
Part Quantity
M6 Lock washer 2
M6 x 8 mm/0.312 long hex head screw 2
12.7 mm/0.500 long Plastite #6 screw 4
8 mm/0.312 long Plastite #6 screw 4
Mounting bracket 2
Procedures for each mounting method are given on the following pages.

9/03
OI Mounting
Panel mounting with brackets

The 559-T12 Operator Interface case can be flush mounted in a cutout and secured using brackets supplied
with the mounting kit.
Step Action
1 At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring
10.625 0.030 inches by 5.190 0.030 inches (269.875 0.76 by 131.825 0.76
millimeters). See Figure 5.
If you are mounting the Operator Interface to a side enclosure as in Figure 6, make sure the
cutout allows for clearance from the enclosures internal panel. The left side of the rear of
the Operator Interface is offset to the right to accommodate that internal panel.
2 Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.
Support the panel as shown in steps 3 and 4.
3 Refer to Figure 7. From the back of the panel, attach a mounting bracket to the top and
bottom of the interface case. Insert the provided M6 hex head screw and lock washer
through the slotted hole in each bracket. Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust
the brackets.
4 While holding the Operator Interface firmly against the panel, slide each bracket against the
back of the panel and tighten the screws.
10.625
269.875
inches
5.190 Dimensions = _________
131.825 millimeters
Figure 5 Cutout dimensions for bracket mounting - Model 559 Type 12

9/03
OI Mounting
Operator
Interface
Enclosure
containing
Operator Interface
and
Controller Module Process
being
controlled
Figure 6 Mounting in a side enclosure - Model 559 Type 12

9/03
OI Mounting
Install Mounting Brackets

Mounting Insert screw in slot
on top and bottom of case
Panel
Rear View
Figure 7 Panel mounting with brackets - Model 559 Type 12
Panel mounting with screws

The 559-T12 Operator Interface can also be panel mounted using screws.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.35 inches (135.9 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the Model 559-T12 Operator Interface.
Step Action
1 At the appropriate mounting location, make a rectangular cutout in the panel measuring
10.625 0.030 inches by 5.190 0.030 inches (269.875 0.76 by 131.825 0.76
millimeters). See Figure 8.
2 Measure and make four cutouts in the panel to accommodate the mounting screws. Refer to
Figure 9 for dimensions.
3 Orient the Operator Interface properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel.
See Figure 9.

9/03
OI Mounting
Step Action
4 Orient the Operator Interface case against the mounting surface and attach using 4 screws
from the rear.
For panels up to 3 mm (0.125) thick, use 9.5 mm (0.375) long Plastite screws provided.
For panels 3 mm (0.125) to 6.4 mm (0.25) thick, use 12.5 mm (0.5) long Plastite screws
provided.
For panels greater than 6.4 mm (0.25) thick, tap the case holes with M3.5 or #6-32 threads
and use screws of appropriate length.
5 Position the Operator Interface firmly against the panel and tighten the screws.
10.808
274.52
10.625
269.875
inches 3.67 + .03

5.190 Dimensions = _________ 93.218 + 0.76
131.825 millimeters
0.156
(4 places)
0.76 3.96
19.3
Figure 8 Cutout for panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12

9/03
OI Mounting
Panel
5.35
135.9
Operator
5.669 3.67 + 0.15
Panel
144 Case 93.2 + 3.8
inches
Dimensions = _________
millimeters
Figure 9 Panel mounting with screws - Model 559 Type 12

9/03
OI Mounting
Model 559 (Type 4)

The 559-T4 Operator Interface must be panel mounted using the supplied hardware.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 5.5 inches (140 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the Model 559 Type 4 Operator Interface.
Step Action
1 If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure.
See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.
2 See Figure 10. Make a cutout in the panel as shown. Drill 12 holes as shown.
3 Install gasket over the 12 threaded studs on the front.
4 Install spacers on each of the 12 studs. If there are 14 spacers (2 extra), install one per
stud.
5 Insert Operator Interface into the panel, left side (latch side) first.
6 Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel. Attach the 12 nuts to the 12 threaded
studs.
7 Tighten nuts to 12 inch-lbs. (1 ft.-lb.)
0.189
2.23 2.23 2.23 2.23 4.8
56.6 56.6 56.6 56.6
2.87
72.8
5.25
133.3
2.87
72.8
0.242
6.15
8.44
0.241 214.3
6.12 inches
Dimensions =
millimeters
Figure 10 Model 559 Type 4 operator interface panel cutout

9/03
OI Mounting
Model 1042
The 1042 OI case can be panel mounted using the supplied clamps.
ATTENTION
Make sure you have a clearance of at least 7.2 inches (183 millimeters) behind the panel to
accommodate the case of the 1042 OI.
The 1042 OI must be panel mounted in a suitable enclosure to maintain the Type 4 enclosure
rating. Failure to follow these mounting instructions could impair the Type 4 enclosure rating.
Table 2 Mounting
Step Action
1 If installing new button label below the display, do so now before continuing this procedure.
See Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31) for details.
2 See Figure 11. Make a cutout in the panel using cutout dimensions shown.
3 Carefuly assemble the gasket into the groove molded into the back of the bezel. The
adhesive side should contact the bezel.
4 Insert OI into the panel. Have a helper hold the unit snugly against the panel.
5 Attach the 18 mounting brackets as shown in Figure 11. Tighten the screws against the
panel thereby compressing the foam gasket. Continue tightening until the back of the plastic
bezel just makes contact with the panel.
Panel
inches Max. thickness
Dimensions =
millimeters 7/16
11.1
Panel cutout width:

14.88 0.03 Attach 18 mounting brackets
Front 1042 dimensions 378.0 0.8 as shown. Tighten screws
(W x H x D) against panel until front gasket
15.8 x 9.8 x 1.1 forms a watertight seal.
400 x 248 x 27
Gasket between
bezel and panel
Panel cutout height:

8.18 0.03
207.8 0.8
Rear 1042 dimensions (W x H x D)
15.9 x 9.2 x 7.2
403 x 233 x 183
Dimensions include mounting brackets
Figure 11 Panel mounting dimensions - Model 1042

9/03
Wiring
Wiring
EXPLOSION HAZARD
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is
known to be non-hazardous. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Power requirement
The OI runs off an external 24 Vdc power supply. Use optional Honeywell part # 51452041-501 or any
UL/CE approved 24 Vdc 1.0A minimum supply.
Power supply mounting

You can mount the optional Honeywell power supply to the rear of the 1042 OI (Table 3). For the 559 OI,
the Honeywell power supply must be mounted separately. Otherwise, provide a 24Vdc power supply and
proceed to Table 4 Wiring.
Table 3 Model 1042 Power supply mounting
Step Action
1 Attach rail:
On the left rear of the OI (below the wiring label), locate the two threaded holes. Using the 2
screws provided, attach the DIN rail with the flanged edges facing out (see 1 and 2 in figure).
3
2
2 Attach power supply:
Hold power supply over the rail, with tab (see 3 in figure) facing away from wiring label on
OI.
Engage the left side (as you look at figure) of the power supply with the rail, engaging the
tabs on the power supplys bottom left side.
With tab (see 3 in figure) pulled out (use a slot screwdriver), lower the right side onto the rail
and press down hard until it clicks into place.
Push tab in until it locks.
Grab the power supply and rock it back and forth to check for snugness against the rail.

9/03
Wiring
Step Action
3 With AC supply power disconnected, connect 3 AC supply wires (ground, positive, and neutral)
to the corresponding terminals of the mounted power supply. There are two screws per
terminaluse either screw.
4 Using 22 gage wire, connect wires to the mounted power supplys COM (-) and 24V (+)
terminals. These wires will connect later to the OI.
Connections
The Honeywell cable that connects the Controller to the OI is 50 (15.42 m) long and can be cut to length.
It is shielded to protect from noise. Up to 2000 (601 m) separation can be obtained by using a Belden
cable #9271 or equivalent.
Table 4 Wiring
Step Action
1 Connect RS485 signal wiring to the controllers 3-position terminal block as shown.
(Note: Wiring is available from Honeywell or from third-party suppliers.)
2 Connect wiring to a 10-position terminal block as shown. See below for terminal assignments.
(Note: Disregard wire colors shown on the back of the 1042 OI.)
Signal Name Description Terminal No.

Receive Controller (-) 1
Receive + Controller (+) 2
Receive Shield Shield (Controller ground) 3
Transmit Shield Shield (Controller ground) 3
Transmit Jumper from 1 4

9/03
Wiring
Step Action
Transmit + Jumper from 2 5
Signal Ground Power supply (-) 6
Outer Shield Unused 7
Unused Unused 8
+24 Vdc Unused 9
+24 Vdc Power supply (+) 10
3 For CE compliance attach a ferrite clamp (Honeywell Part No. 51191902-101) close to the
terminals (within 1/2"). The ferrite clamp should overlap the cable shield that encloses the wires.
To prevent the clamp from sliding, attach cable ties (Honeywell Part No. 089037) snugly against
each end of the clamp.
Trim the cable ties, leaving a "tail" of approximately one inch. (example is Model 1042)
Ferrite Clamp
Cable Ties

9/03
Wiring
Step Action
4 Attached the assembled wiring connectors to the OI as shown. Use keyboard connector for
data entry with optional AT keyboard.
Model 1042
Pin 1 Pin 10
Power and Signal Keyboard
559-T12 559-T4
Operator Interface Operator Interface
Rear Rear
Pin 1 Pin 10
Pin 10 Pin 1
Connector for
power and signal

9/03
Noise Protection
Noise Protection
See document 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise
Environments.
Startup
After connecting the Controller and OI and applying power to the Controller, the startup display appears.
YOUR TEXT
HERE
SUPPORTING TEXT LINE 1
Figure 12 Startup display
What to do if the OI has difficulty starting up

During power up the OI may get stuck in a cycle of alternating between the startup screen and shutting
down. This problem may be caused by a weak capacitor or it may occur after power has been disconnected
for an unusually long time. Long time depends on the condition of the capacitor, the ambient
temperature, or other factors. To correct this problem you must manually perform a cold start. A cold
start clears the OI memory.
Performing a cold start
Step Action
1 Turn the OIs power off.
2 Press and hold the ESC key.
3 While holding the ESC key turn the OIs power on. The startup screen should appear normally.
ATTENTION
If the OI has been powered OFF for more than 18 hours, the default start-up screen
will display instead of the user-configured text until communications has started to the
controller and the user-configured text is uploaded.

9/03
Keys and Displays Overview
Overview of Keys
The Operator Interface (Figure 13) and (Figure 14) consists of standard and custom keys, a floppy drive
(optional Zip Drive for Model 1042) for storing and loading data, and an optional keyboard connector for
data entry through an AT keyboard.
Keys (top to bottom)
Main Menu Help Alarms Optional 3.5
Auto/Manual Details Tab Forward Floppy drive
Display Next Digit Decrement/Down Increment/Up
Display Function Keys (rear access on
Escape Enter Enter
( pushbuttons) Model 559 - T4
Page Down Page Up
F1 ? ALARM
F2
F3
F4 ESC
1 2 3 4 5
KB
Keyboard connector
Keys 1 - 5: Access up to 10 Displays each (rear access on the OI-559 T4 model )
Figure 13 View of a 559 operator interface

You can attach an AT keyboard to the front for easier data entry (rear access on the OI-559 T4 model).
Simply plug the keyboard into the port under the floppy drive. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

9/03
Overview of Keys
3.5 floppy drive (standard)

100 Mbyte Zip drive (optional) F1 - F4 keys (pushbuttons)
Honeywell
F1 7 8 9
4 5 6
F2 Numeric entry
1 2 3
F3
. 0 -
F4
? ALARM
Menu - Help - Alarm
Auto/Manual - Detail - Tab
Left Arrow - Decrement - Increment
ESC Escape - Enter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display Group keys Page Up

Page Down
Figure 14 View of 1042 OI

You can attach an AT keyboard to the rear of Model 1042 for easier data entry. Simply plug the keyboard
into the port. See Table 5 for key equivalents.

9/03
Standard Keys
Standard Keys
Overview
The appearance and action of the standard keys are given in Table 5. Refer to this table for direction with
any display. Unless otherwise noted, standard keys always behave as described here regardless of which
display or menu is displayed.
You can attach an AT keyboard for easier data entry, just plug the keyboard into the port. See Table 5.
Table 5 Standard key actions
Key Key Name AT Action

keyboard
equivalent
Menu Home Accesses the Main Menu.

See Overview of Displays (page 33).
Help End Accesses the Help Text Displays, which contain help on
? various procedures. See Other Displays (page 263).
Alarm F3 Accesses the Alarm Summary.
ALARM From the Alarm Group Display, this key acknowledges all
alarms on the page. See NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display
for Model 559 consists of two pages. This first page shows the
status for Alarm Groups 1 through 10; the second page shows
the status for Alarm Groups 11 through 20. Use the page Up
and Down keys to go between these two displays.
Alarm Group (page 132).
Auto/Manual F2 On a loop display, toggles the selected loop between

Automatic and Manual modes.
Detail F1 On Loop displays, moves cursor to SP and Output.
On Trend and Panel Displays, accesses a submenu

containing further detailed functions.
On Alarm Group display, moves cursor down a column.
Tab Tab On multiple Loop displays, moves cursor between the loop
tags on the display. Press Enter to access a more detailed
display related to the selected loop tag.
On Alarm Group display, moves cursor across a row.
Left Arrow When cursor is on a value or setting that can be changed, this
key moves cursor one position to the left, eventually wrapping
around to the rightmost position.

9/03
Common Tasks Using Standard Keys
Key Key Name AT Action

keyboard
equivalent
Decrement Moves cursor down a menu or list of choices. Selecting down

on the last menu item sets the focus on the first menu item.
When cursor is on a data entry field, decrements value or

state.
On a trend display, scrolls trend backward in time.
Increment Moves cursor up a menu or list of choices. Selecting up on the

first menu item sets the focus on the last menu item.
On a selected data entry field, increments value or state.
On a trend display, scrolls trend forward in time.
Escape Esc Backs you out of the current display or cursor position to the
ESC previous one. Any data entered or changes you made are not
saved, except changes to a loops live values (output and
setpoint value).
Enter Enter Selects the field highlighted by the green cursor, taking you to
another display or enabling you to change the fields value or
setting.
Saves a new value or setting.
Page Down Page Accesses the next page of a multi-page display.

Down
Accesses the next display in the sequence of the Display
Group key.
Page Up Page Accesses the previous page of a multi-page display.

Up
Accesses the previous display in the sequence of the Display
Group key.
Numeric Same Facilitates easy data entry for setpoints, variables, setpoint
0 keys programs, and other numeric setup parameters
thru Model
9
1042 Only
-

Table 6 Tasks using standard keys
Task Procedure
To see the Main Menu

Press Menu

9/03
Task Procedure
To move the cursor up or down any menu or list

Press Increment or Decrement .
Menu wrap is enabled for menus that do not scroll and
disabled for scrolling menus.
To see helpful text ?

Press Help .
To select a menu item to view its submenu or choices With the cursor on the desired item, press Enter .
or value The submenu appears, or the cursor moves to the right
side of the display so you can select another choice or
value.
To change a menu items value or setting Model 559/1042
With the cursor on the value or setting on the right side of

the display, press Increment and Decrement to
change a digits value or to see other choices. Press
to move to another digit in the value.
Model 1042 only

Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9 to enter a value.
The new value or setting does not take effect until you
press Enter . If you change your mind and decide
to leave the value or setting unchanged, press Escape
ESC
.
To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and

MANUAL Press Auto/Manual
To ignore changes you made or are about to make to ESC

a value or setting Press Escape . The cursor moves from the right to
the left side of the display, and the value or setting
remains unchanged.
To back out of a display or menu or to return to a ESC

previous display or menu item Press Escape .
To see a detailed popup menu related to an operating

or monitoring display (such as a trend). (An operating Press Detail .
or monitoring display is accessed by pressing one of
the keys below the display. See Other Operating AI2 2200.00 DEGF
Displays section and Monitoring Displays section.) 2500.0

07:35 07:55 08:15 08:35
SCROLL
SET HOLD
DETAIL
ZOOM
1500.0

9/03
Task Procedure
To manually change a control loops output or setpoint Model 1042 only: Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9
value
to manually enter a value. Press Enter to accept
ESC
the value, press Escape to leave it unchanged.
Model 559/1042: Press Increment or Decrement

to manually select a value. Changes to a value are done
live and do not require pressing Enter, you can not
ESC
cancel the changes by pressing Escape .

9/03
Task Procedure
To adjust a loops setpoint, output, or switch between Access one of the following displays:
Local and Remote setpoints
Loop Trend: Loop Summary:
LOOPTAG1 TUNE MAY06 LOOP SUMMARY

11:30
AUTO RSP ENGU
2500.0
07:35 07:55 08:15
MODE PV SP OUT
LOOPTAG1 MAN LSP 1234567 1234567 100.
LOOPTAG2 AUTO RSP 2000. 2000. 50.
LOOPTAG3 AUTO LSP 2000. 2000. 50.
LOOPTAG6 AUTO LSP 2000. 2000. 50.
LOOPTAG7 MAN LSP 2000. 2000. 50.
1500.0 LOOPTAG8 MAN LSP 2000. 2000. 50.
PV 2205.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 DEV 205.0
2, 3, 4, or 8 Multi-Loop Single Loop Numeric:

Faceplates:
LOOPTAG1 LOOPTAG2 LOOPTAG3 2500.0 LOOPTAG1

2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 AUTO LSP TUNE
AL1 AL2
PV
2205.0 ENGU
1500.0 1500.0 1500.0 SP 2000.0
PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5
OUT 83.5 %
AUTO LSP AUTO RSP MAN LSP 1500.0
Notice these displays have a cursor around the loop tag
at the top of the display. Press Tab to move cursor
to the desired loop tag. Press Detail to move

between the loop tag, SP value, and Output value (if in
Manual). Adjust values as in previous task in this table.
With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter to jump to

that loops control screen:
LOOP CONTROL
LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU
TYPE PID
PV 1234567
OUTPUT 1234567
LOCAL SP 1234567
REMOTE SP 1234567
SWITCH SP
See Loop control (page 119).
To see an overview list of alarms

Press Alarm ALARM
To acknowledge all alarms in the currently displayed

group of alarms (up to 12 alarms) Press Alarm ALARM

9/03
Task Procedure
To see other operating and monitoring displays Up to 10 displays can be accessed with each Display
Group key. Press Page Up and Page Down to

see other displays assigned to a key.
To scroll backward and forward in time through vertical With a trend display, press Increment or Decrement
or horizontal trends
. Or, press Detail to show the popup menu. For
other trend actions, see Trend Displays (page 254).

9/03
User-assignable Keys
The function and factory-shipped appearance of the user-assignable keys is described in Table 7. A display
group key's appearance can be changed [see Relabeling Display Group Keys (page 31)] so their appearance
may vary from Table 6 and Figure 13 and Figure 14. Specific functions of these keys are programmed
with the Hybrid Control Designer, a tool for configuring the OI for its end user.
Keys F1-F4
The keys F1-F4 are active on certain user-assignable displays and on a few standard displays. The use of
the keys is explained with the displays in which they are used. For all other displays these keys are
inactive.
Display Group keys 1-5 (Model 1042, keys 1- 8)

Each Display Group Key can be programmed to access up to 10 operating and monitoring displays. Refer
to Other Operating Displays section and Monitoring Displays section for descriptions and tasks related to
these displays. Model 1042 has 8 Display Group Keys, and Model 559 has 5 keys. These keys are located
along the bottom of the Operator Interface, as shown in Figure 13 and Figure 14.
Task Procedure
To see the last display shown from this group Press the desired Display Group key.
To see the next or previous display assigned to a key Press Page Down or Page Up.

9/03
Table 7 User-assignable key actions
Key Key Name AT keyboard Action

equivalent
Pushbutton 1 F5 The use of the F1 - F4 keys are discussed throughout the

manual for the displays in which they are used.
F1
Pushbutton 2 F6
F2
Pushbutton 3 F7
F3
Pushbutton 4 F8
F4
Display Group 1 F9 Each Display Group key displays the last display shown from
a group of up to ten pre-configured operating and monitoring
1 displays.
Press Page Up or Page Down to show the next display in the

Display Group 2 F10 keys sequence, eventually wrapping around to the first
2 display.
Display Group 3 F11

3
Display Group 4 F12

4
Display Group 5 F4
5
Display Group 6 Shift + F10

6
Display Group 7 Shift + F11 MODEL 1042 ONLY

7
Display Group 8 Shift + F12

8

9/03
Relabeling Display Group Keys

You may customize the appearance of the Display Group keys 1-5[8] by giving them names that describe
your application. For example, if you have configured Display Group #1 key to show all the Loop displays,
you could replace the label "1"with a more descriptive label like LOOPS.
Step Action
1 All models:
Disconnect power or disconnect the cable from the rear of the Operator Interface.
2 Model 559 Type 12:

Unscrew the bolts under the floppy drive cover on the right front.
Model 559 Type 4:

Remove the 4 screws on the left and right sides of the unit.
Model 1042:
Remove the 4 screws on the rear of the unit.
3 Model 559 Type 12:

Pry off the right side of the front, towards you, as if opening a door. The left side will remain
engaged on hinge-like appendages.
Model 559 Type 4:

Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.
Model 1042:
Carefully remove the front without breaking the wire cable connection.
4 Model 559:
Disengage the left side by pulling the front out and to the right. Be careful not to stretch or break
attached wires and cables.
5 All models:
Disconnect all wires and cables connected to the front.
6 All models:
Looking at the rear of the front you just removed, notice the slots containing the labels for the
keys. Remove the labels by pulling them out.
7 All models:
Create new label strips from clear or white plastic. Most word processors on a personal
computer let you create custom documents. Use the dimensions shown in Figure 15 and Figure
16 and keep text or symbols within the boxes shown. Round off the corners of the strip to allow
easy insertion.
8 All models:
To replace the labels, reverse steps 1 through 6. If you have difficulty inserting the new label,
try gripping it with needle nose pliers and inserting it.

9/03
2 1/16 10 3/8 16 5/8
13 1/2 14 9/16
119 4 5/8 39 1 5/8

158 6 1/4
Key:
mm inches
Figure 15 Model 559 Display key label dimensions
3/16 3/8 5/8

4.7 10 16
0.05 9/16
1 2 3 4 13 14
3 13/16 3.0
97 76
6 13/16
173 Dimensions = Inches
millimeters
Note: There are 2 labels of 4 keys each
Figure 16 Model 1042 Display Group key label dimensions

9/03
Overview of Displays
Display areas defined
Displays have certain areas in common. See Figure 17 and Table 8.
Title
PAGE N OF M Time:Date
Body of Display
Contains menu or
graphics
ALARM D MESSAGE TXT EVENT SHZ RUN
Figure 17 Display areas defined
Table 8 Display areas defined details
Area of Display Purpose/Description
Title Describes display contents.
PAGE N OF M Current page number of the active display. Appears when more information is
accessible through Page Up and Page Down keys.
Indicates there is more information offscreen. Press Increment or Decrement

keys to scroll to more information.
Time:Date Time and Date
Body of Display Area between the title and the bottom area contains graphical data or a text
menu.
ALARM Red. Indicates an alarm exists. When flashing, indicates an alarm is

unacknowledged. See Alarms section.
D Blue. Indicates a diagnostic exists. See Diagnostics (page 136).
MESSAGE TXT Blue: Diagnostic message. See Diagnostics (page 136).
Green: Data Storage message. See Messages (page 267).
EVENT Yellow: User-configured events.

9/03
Area of Display Purpose/Description
RUN Controllers mode of operation:
RUN: Controller is running normally.

PROG: Controller is in Program mode.
OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode.
FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch.
NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding or briefly during
mode changes or during hot or cold starts.
RUN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress.
PROG (flashing green): Download to OI in progress. This is not a controller
cold start.
OFLN (flashing green): Download to OI in progress.
Flashing green mode indicator can also mean one of the following changes are
being downloaded to the controller:
New language
New filename prefix
New security settings
New Data Storage Setting (.DSS)
New recipe, profile, schedule, or sequence
SHZ Indicates special conditions are in effect for this display.
Storage: Data Storage is actively collecting data and saving it to the floppy disk
or to the internal buffer. See Data Storage section.
Hold: A display that usually rotates through several points is on Hold on a single
point. See Hold in Table 157.
Zoom: A trend display is in zoom (magnification) view mode. See Zoom in

Table 157.
Display organization
Displays are accessed according to the following hierarchy. Notice that the keys in Figure 18 give you
direct access to displays. The remaining keys let you navigate within displays and switch to other displays.
NOTE: Model 1042 has eight Display Group keys and a numeric keypad.
Model 559 has five Display Groups and no numeric keypad.

9/03
? 1 2 . . . 5 8 1042
ALARM
559
MAIN MENU MESSAGES ALARM SUMMARY

Access to loops, USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED
Up to 10 pages Shows status of all alarm
recipes, setpoints, DISPLAY #1 DISPLAY #1 DISPLAY #1
of helpful messages. groups.
I/O summary, Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop,
variables, storage, setpoint program, setpoint program, setpoint program,
utilities. alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes,
sequencer, scheduler, sequencer, scheduler, sequencer, scheduler,
pushbuttons, panel, pushbuttons, panel, pushbuttons, panel,
overview, messages. overview, messages. overview, messages.
ALARM GROUP USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED

Shows individual DISPLAY #2 DISPLAY #2 DISPLAY #2
status of each Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop,
alarm in a group. setpoint program, setpoint program, setpoint program,
alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes,
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
ALARM GROUP USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED USER-DEFINED
Shows individual DISPLAY #10 DISPLAY #10 DISPLAY #10
status of each Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop, Trend, bar graph, loop,
alarm in a group. setpoint program, setpoint program, setpoint program,
alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes, alarms, recipes,
Figure 18 Display organization
Standard and user-assignable displays

Standard displays are accessed under the Menu key, that is, they are not user-assignable. They contain
textual descriptions of functions you can choose from. See Main Menu tree in
ATTENTION
The 559 and 1042 have different menu structures. Program must be in READY state to be
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related screens
on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be individually
disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have been enabled
via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.
Table 11.
User-assignable displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer configuration tool and are
1 5 8
accessed with the Display Group keys through [ ] . See Table 9.

9/03
User-assignable displays
1 5 8
The displays accessed under the Display Group keys through [ ] are assigned to those keys
using the Hybrid Control Designer tool.
TIP
Since the Display Group keys are selectable in the Hybrid Control Designer, consider taking
advantage of this feature by grouping related displays under each Display Group key. For
example, on each key you can configure a sequence of 10 displays in order of importance to
the process. You can also configure Help text (messages) to appear on these keys.

9/03
1 5 8
Table 9 shows all displays that can be assigned to keys through [ ]. Each item is subordinate
to the item to its left or upper left.
Table 9 User-assignable displays

See Page Top level Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
117 Loops:
ILOOP SUMMARY LOOP CONTROL
8-LOOPS LOOP CONTROL
1-LOOP NUMERIC LOOP CONTROL
LOOP W/TREND LOOP CONTROL
AUTO/MANUAL BIAS LOOP CONTROL
47 Recipes:
LOAD RECIPE
55 Set point programmers:

SPP OPERATE (1) LOAD LOAD PROGRAM LOAD PROGRAM
FROM LIST
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
77 Set point schedulers:

SPS OPERATE LOAD LOAD SCHEDULE LOAD SCHEDULE
FROM LIST
CLEAR
VIEW EVENTS
VIEW AUX
EDIT
SAVE
89 Sequencer
SEQUENCER OPERATE VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE EDIT STEP DETAILS EDIT STEPS
VIEW STEP DETAILS
LOAD SEQUENCE LOAD SEQUENCE LOAD SEQUENCE
FROM LIST
EDIT STEPS
SAVE SEQUENCE
CLEAR SEQUENCER

9/03

229 Data Storage
DATA STORAGE
STATUS
239 Pushbuttons F1-F4:

PUSHBUTTONS
SELECTOR SWITCHES SWITCH CONTROL
DEVICE CONTROL EDIT DEVICE
OPERATE
HOA SWITCH SET HOA SWITCH
STAGE OPERATE EDIT STAGE MENU EDIT STAGE
RAMP OPERATE EDIT RAMP MENU EDIT RAMP
ALTERNATOR EDIT ALTERNATOR EDIT OUTPUT
OPERATE SELECTIONS
EDIT INPUT
SELECTIONS
EDIT OUTPUT
SEQUENCE
254 Trends:
VERTICAL TREND
VERTICAL TREND
W/HORIZ. BARS
HORIZ. TREND
HORIZ. TREND
W/DIGITALS
HORIZ. TRENDS
W/VERT. BARS
258 Bar graphs:

3 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS
6 HORIZ. BAR GRAPHS
3 VERT. BAR GRAPHS
6 VERT. BAR GRAPHS
259 Panels:
SINGLE PT. ROTATING
PANEL
MULTI-PT (4) PANEL
MULTI-PT (7) PANEL
12-PT PANEL METER
OVERVIEW
ALARM GROUP ALARM DETAILS
263 Other
MESSAGE TEXT

9/03

9/03
Main Menu
Overview
What is the Main Menu?
The Main Menu is accessed any time from any display by pressing Menu . It contains functions for
setting up or adjusting the controller for operation. For example, you can tune control loops, view events,
edit setpoint profiles, calibrate analog inputs or analog outputs, and load and store profiles and recipes.
ATTENTION
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related
screens on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be
individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have
been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.
Table 6 describes how to use the keys to interact with all the menus.
Table 10 explains the Main Menu functions
Table 10 Top level functions of main menu
Menu Item Function
Recipes View, load, and edit recipes. A recipe is a group of variables whose values are
changed when the recipe is loaded.
SP Programmers Adjust and set up setpoint programs. A setpoint program is a time-varying
setpoint and associated discrete states.
SP Schedulers Adjust and set up setpoint schedules. A setpoint schedule is a sequence of
segments, where each segment contains multiple setpoints, auxiliary outputs, and
events.
Sequencers Adjust and set up sequences. A sequence can be a very rigid series of inter-
related events used to start-up or shut-down a unit process, or it can be a series
of timed and process measurement dependent events that are executed to
produce a final product.
Loops Adjust and set up control loops.
Alarms/Events/ View status of alarms, events, and diagnostics.
Diagnostics
Summary Displays Review I/O summaries and variables in the controllers configuration.
Unit Setup Perform unit maintenance activities such as calibrating inputs and outputs, setting
security, and testing the instruments functions.
Disk Utilities Load and store disk files.
Data Storage Store process data to the disk.
Log Off Secure the instrument when leaving it unattended.

9/03
Main Menu
Overview
Main menu tree
Access the Main Menu by pressing . The menu is organized as shown in

ATTENTION
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related screens
on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be individually
disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have been enabled
via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.
Table 11. For more details on a top-level item, go to the specified page.
ATTENTION
edited. In some cases, a single screen on the 1042 can serve to replace multiple related
screens on the 559 since there is more display space available
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, the items on the Main Menu display can be
individually disabled via the HC Designer configuration software. Only those items that have
been enabled via HC Designer will be shown on the Main Menu display.
Table 11 Main menu tree

46 RECIPES SELECT RECIPE EDIT EDIT RECIPE
LOAD
48 SP PROGRAMMERS SELECT PROGRAM EDIT PROGRAM EDIT SEGMENT EDIT SEG>EVENTS

SAVE PROGRAM
67 SP SCHEDULERS SELECT SCHEDULE EDIT SCHEDULE EDIT SEGMENTS EDIT SETPOINTS

EDIT EVENTS
EDIT GUAR HOLD
SAVE SCHEDULE
EDIT GUAR HOLD
LIMITS
89 SEQUENCERS SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT SEQUENCE EDIT STEPS EDIT STEP DETAILS
VIEW STEP DETAILS
SAVE SEQUENCE

9/03
Main Menu
Overview

105 LOOPS SELECT LOOP LOOP TREND LOOP TUNE
CONSTANTS
AUTOTUNE
LOOP TUNE
CONSTANTS
CONTROL SETUP
CARBON LOOP SETUP
ALARM SETPOINTS
LIMITS
HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING
125 SUMMARY DISPLAYS ANALOG INPUT

SUMMARY
ANALOG OUTPUT
SUMMARY
DIGITAL INPUT
SUMMARY
DIGITAL OUTPUT
SUMMARY
VARIABLE SUMMARY
ALARM/EVENT/DIAG
131 ALARMS ALARM SUMMARY ALARM GROUP ALARM DETAIL
135 EVENTS EVENT SUMMARY
136 DIAGNOSTICS CONTROLLER I/O MODULE MODULE DETAILS
DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS
COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION PORT
OI PORT
NETWORK PORT VIEW HOST
CONNECTIONS
VIEW PEER
CONNECTIONS
EXPANSION IO PORT
I/O MODULE MODULE DETAILS
DIAGNOSTICS
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC
LOG

9/03
Main Menu
Overview

153 UNIT SETUP CONTROLLER STATUS
SET MODE
SET TIME AND DATE
SET SECURITY
REVIEW SECURITY
SET LANGUAGE
COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION PORT
OI PORT
NETWORK PORT VIEW HOST NETWORK HOST
CONNECTIONS STATISTICS
VIEW PEER NETWORK PEER
CONNECTIONS STATISTICS
EXPANSION I/O PORT
FILE NAME SELECTIONS
SELF TESTS KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
DISK TEST
CALIBRATE AI SET CONTROLLER
MODE
CALIBRATE CHANNEL
CALIBRATE CJ TEMP
RESTORE AI FACTORY
CAL
RESTORE CJ FACTORY
CAL
CALIBRATE AO SET CONTROLLER
MODE
CALIBRATE AO
CHANNEL
RESTORE AO CAL
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

9/03
Main Menu
Overview

201 DISK UTILITIES LIST DISK FILES
LOAD/STORE PROFILES LOAD LOAD FROM DISK
STORE STORE TO DISK
LOAD/STORE RECIPES LOAD LOAD FROM DISK
STORE STORE TO DISK
LOAD/STORE LOAD LOAD FROM DISK
SCHEDULES
STORE STORE TO DISK
LOAD/STORE LOAD LOAD FROM DISK
SEQUENCES
STORE STORE TO DISK
LOAD CONFIGURATION
STORE
CONFIGURATION
FORMAT DISK
SET CONTROLLER
MODE
219 DATA STORAGE STORAGE STATUS

STORAGE CONTROLS
INITIALIZE STORAGE
DISK
LOAD STORAGE
SETTINGS
VIEW STORAGE TREND 1 STORAGE
SETTINGS
TREND 2 STORAGE
POINT LOG STORAGE
ALARM/EVENT
STORAGE
START NEW STORAGE
SETTINGS
STORE STORAGE
SETTINGS
237 LOG OFF

9/03
Recipes
Overview
Recipes
Access
Main menu.
Load Recipe is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.
Description
A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe, the values or states
of the variables in the recipe replace the values of those variables in the controllers configuration.
Procedure
Select a recipe to edit or load. Select Cancel to return to the Main Menu.
Edit/View recipe
A recipes variable is analog or digital. The setting for an analog point can be any numerical value, and a
digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.
Starting with Version 2.100 of the HC900, recipe editing can be disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software. If recipe editing has been disabled you will still be able to view the contents of any
recipe using the VIEW selection.
Table 12 Recipe edit/view details
Feature Description
TAGNAME n The name of the variable in the recipe.
Value or State Indicates the current value or state of the variable. Press Enter to edit.
Engineering Units The engineering units associated with the variable.
Page number Indicates multiple pages
DESCRIPTOR(1042) Optional descriptor of recipe. If descriptor not entered, TAGNAME is repeated.

9/03
Recipes
Overview
Load recipe
This display is also accessible from the Display Group keys, if so configured.
Select Load to load the recipe into the controller configuration. A message confirms when the load is
completed.
TIP
When you load a recipe, you are in effect writing new values to those variables in the
configuration. Be aware that the controller configuration may contain a Recipe Load function
block that, without your knowledge, can load a second recipe after you loaded one here. If this
second recipe is loaded, the values you just loaded may be overwritten by different values.
The effect is that some or all of the recipe values or states you intended to load are not in
effect.
To check that your recipe load took effect, after loading a recipe you can view the variables to
see they are set to the desired recipe values or states. See Summary Displays (page 125).
If a recipes variables do not seem to be loading properly, consider reconfiguring the controller
to eliminate the Recipe Load function block that is causing the conflict.

9/03
Setpoint Programmers
Overview
Access
Main menu.
Description
A setpoint programmer supplies a time-varying setpoint to a control loop. A program contains multiple
segments; each segment can be a ramp or a soak and has digital switches called events. This menu lets
you edit setpoint program segments, segment events, or other parameters and save the changes to the
controllers memory.
Each program contains multiple segments. Each segment of the program may be a ramp or soak except the
last segment must be a soak.
Multiple programs can be running concurrently. Programmers can run any of the profiles in controller
memory. Once loaded from memory into the Setpoint Programmer (SPP) function, these profiles are
referred to as programs. Any program can be edited and saved as a profile in one of the slots in the
controllers memory.
In addition to the main output value, a second analog value is available for each step of the program. This
output is a fixed soak value which may be used as an input to another function or to provide a setpoint
value for a secondary control loop in the process.
A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the program if a process
variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Selections allow setpoint guarantee to be active for
the entire program, for soak segments only, or for user specified segments.
Up to 3 Process Variables may be configured as inputs to the block for setpoint guarantee.
The program may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator
as well as by inputs to the SPP block. Table 13 lists the resulting states.
Table 13 SPP inputs and current state
Input Current State
READY HOLD RUN GHOLD STOP
RESET READY READY RUN READY READY
HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD STOP
RUN RUN RUN RUN GHOLD STOP
GHOLD READY HOLD GHOLD GHOLD STOP
With regard to changing program state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution
cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.
Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel which occur during the same
execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the last
change wins.

9/03
Setpoint Program Setup
Setpoint Program Setup

Access
Setpoint Program setup is donethrough the SP Programmers Menu, accessed through the Main Menu. Press
"Enter" for Select Program menu. Press "Enter" again to Edit Program.
See also
While operating Setpoint Program functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Whats in this section
Topic See Page
Select Program 50
Edit Program 51
Edit Program Segments 53
Save Program 54

9/03
Select program
Select program
Select a program to edit. The Edit Program menu is then displayed.
NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.
TIP
Program must be in READY to be edited.
See also
While operating Setpoint Programming functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.

9/03
Edit program
Edit program
This display lets you edit parameters of the selected program. Edits affect only the currently working
program, not the profile in memory, unless you save the program.
ATTENTION
Program must be in READY state to be edited.
Table 14 Edit program details
Feature Description
EDIT SEGMENTS Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 53) where you can edit each
segment.
SAVE PROGRAM Saves changes you make to this display. Program is saved in the
controllers profile memory where it can be loaded and run later.
LABEL, DESCRIPTION Identifies the program with text.
RAMP TYPE TIME: Each ramp segments time is the TIME allotted to the profiles
output to reach the next soak segments value in hours or minutes.
OR
RATE: Each ramp segments time specifies the RATE at which that
profiles output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is
specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.
Make this selection before entering any Ramp during Profile Edit.
NOTE: When Ramp unit is configured for TIME, entering 0 will imply an
immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak.
TIME UNITS This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the ramp type
selected.
For Time ramp type: Time = Hours or Minutes
For Rate ramp type: Rate = EU/Hour or EU/Minutes
PRIMARY OUTPUT LABEL Label associated with the PV.
PRIMARY ENG UNITS Engineering Units of the PV
GUAR HOLD TYPE Guaranteed Hold, if enabled here, will hold the profile value if a PV to the
profile (typically a control loops PV) deviates specified amounts above or
below the profile output.
None: No segments have guaranteed hold enabled.
Per Seg: Lets you select specific segments for guaranteed hold where
you set up the profile ramps and soaks.
All Soaks: All soak segments will have a guaranteed hold enabled.
All Segs: All segments will have guaranteed hold enabled.
GUAR HOLD LO LIM The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount below the
profile setpoint.

9/03
Edit program
Feature Description
GUAR HOLD HI LIM The profile will hold if a PV deviates more than this amount above the
profile setpoint.
LOOP START SEGMENT The first segment of the loop.
LOOP END SEGMENT The last segment of the loop.
LOOP CYCLES Number of times the loop segments will execute. Zero (0) means the
segments will be repeated forever.
JOG SEGMENT Segment to which the program will jump to when the JOG discrete input is
pulsed.
RESTART RATE This recovery ramp rate is provided in the event of a power loss while a
program is running. The Restart Rate value is used to return the process
to the last operating setpoint prior to power loss.
AUX OUT LABEL A second analog value is available for each segment of the program. It is
a fixed soak value and can be used to provide a setpoint value for a
secondary control loop in the process.
Enter up to 8 characters for the label.
AUX ENG UNITS Up to 4 characters. This is the engineering unit text associated with the
AUX OUT.
FAST FORWARD Fast Forward is a way to check for proper functioning of the profiles
events and outputs, without having to wait for the profile to execute at its
normal speed. When FAST FORWARD is ON, the program will run at a
speed 60 times faster. When FAST FORWARD is OFF, the program will
run at normal speed.

9/03
Edit segments
Edit segments
This menu lets you specify segment parameters.
Table 15 Edit segment details
Feature Description
F1 NEXT SEG Press F1 to edit next segment.
F2 PREV SEG Press F2 to edit previous segment.
EDITING PROGRAM # Number of program being edited and its label.
SEGMENT # Segment being edited.
SEGMENT TYPE Ramp or Soak. Last segment must be a soak.
STARTING VALUE Starting value of the segment.
TIME/RATE Range = 0.00 hr. to 999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 999.99 min. The function of
this value depends on the Ramp Type (see Table 14).
GUAR HOLD Select ON to enable setpoint guarantee if GHOLD is Per Segment.
AUX START VALUE Select a fixed soak value for this segment.
EVENTS Model 559:

Select "EVENTS" to access the Edit Segment Events menu.
Model 1042:
Edit the segment events on this display (ON or OFF).
Edit Segment Events

You can configure 1 to 16 segment events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment
events are digital switches that provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains
ON until the end of the segment at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the
next segment. Note that segment events are not interrupted by soak time delays when the process variable
is outside the guaranteed soak band. Events turn ON as soon as the previous segment is completed even if
the process variable has not reached the soak setpoint.
TIP
Events can be edited only while program is in READY state.

9/03
Save program
Save program
This function saves a program to the controllers profile memory. A programmer can run any of the
profiles in controller memory. Once loaded from controller memory into the Setpoint Programmer function,
these profiles are known as programs. You can choose to save a program (profile) back to controller
memory after editing it. See Figure 19.
Table 16 Save Program details
Feature Description
CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER The number, name, and description of the profile currently
CURRENT PROFILE NAME loaded into the programmer.
CURRENT PROFILE DESCR
SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER There are multiple slots available in memory for profiles.
ATTENTION: You will overwrite any profile in the slot. Select

the desired slot and press Enter to save the profile. The profile
is also saved in the program.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Program

function has been disabled via the HC Designer configuration
software (Version 2.100 and later).
SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Program function has been disabled via the HC
Designer configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).
Bold items are read only.
Profiles in RAM SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 05

11:30
Step 1 STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP

RUN 3 2 F1
Profile #1 PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN
PV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU
F2
SP 1449.0 ENGU 31.1
Profile #2 ENGU
HOLD
ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME 0001:30:00
ELAPSED PGM TIME 0006:00:00 F3
Profile #3 SEG TIME REMAIN 0000:10:00
RESET
* On Model 559, select
Profile #3 was PV2 0
. PV3 0
.
previously LOAD
CLEAR
EV1
EV1
EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
F4
ADV
"More Commands"
loaded into SP EDIT EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
then SAVE in the dialog box.

. SAVE EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
Program #1.
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
ALARM D MESSAG E TEXT S HZ RUN
Step 5 Step 2 Select SAVE*
Program #1 now contains
Step 4
Program #1 is saved as
Profile #2.
Profile #2 in RAM SAVE PROGRAM 1
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 05
11:30
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP Profiles in RAM CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 3

RUN 2 2 F1
SAVE TO PROFILE NUMBER 2
PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN Profile #1
F2
SP 1449.0 ENGU 31.1 ENGU Profile #2
Step 3
HOLD
ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME 0001:30:00
ELAPSED PGM TIME 0006:00:00 F3 Profile #3
SEG TIME REMAIN 0000:10:00
RESET
PV2 0 . Select SAVE TO
PV3 0
LOAD EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
F4 . PROFILE NUMBER 2
CLEAR
EDIT
EV1
EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
OFF
ADV
.
SAVE EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S HZ RUN
Figure 19 Example of saving a program on Model 1042

9/03
Setpoint Program Operation
Setpoint Program Operation

Overview
1 5
Setpoint program operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys through [ 8 ]
Selection of display formats is performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are
described in this section.
See also
While performing setpoint program operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Topic See Page
Single SP Program Operation - Model 1042 56
Single SP Program Operation - Model 559 58
Operate Popup Menu (More Commands) - Model 559 60
View Program Events - Model 559 61
View Program Details -- Model 559 62
Load Program 62
Edit Segments 65
Security
When Security is enabled (see Set Security), the SPP operate display works as follows:
When the display is initially called, the security pop-up appears. Enter the proper security code then re-
select the function. Access is permitted without further interruption of the security pop-up until the
display is removed from view.

9/03
SPP operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.
It includes SPP Operate details as well as Program Event details on one screen.
Date
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 11:30
MYPROFIL MY TEST PROFILE F1

STATE PROF SEG SOAK RUN
RUN # 3 # 2
PRIMARY AUXLABEL F2
PV 1450.0 31.0
HOLD
SP 1449.0 31.1
ELAPSED SEG TIME 00:30:00
PGM ELAPSED TIME 02:00:00
SEG TIME REMAIN 01:30:00 F3
PV2 0.0
RESET
PV3 0.0
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
LOAD EV2 OFF EV10 OFF
CLEAR EV3 OFF EV11 OFF
F4
EV4 OFF EV12 OFF
EDIT EV5 OFF EV13 OFF ADV
SAVE EV6
EV7
OFF
OFF
EV14
EV15
OFF
OFF
EV8 OFF EV16 OFF
RUN
Figure 20 SPP operation - Model 1042

Table 17 SPP details - Model 1042
Feature Description
SPTAG1 Name of the selected programmer block.
MYPROFIL Name of the selected profile.
MY TEST PROFILE Description of the selected profile.
STATE READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All
events are OFF.
HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Profile is executing normally.
GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.
DISABLE: Profile is prevented from starting until the programmer disable
control is ON.
PROFILE Profile # is the memory location of this profile.
SEGMENT Current segment
RAMP or Type of current segment: ramp or soak
SOAK
Current segment, next segment indicators.
Left box: current segment type.
Right box: next segment type.
Ramp up Soak
Ramp down Blank

In Ready state, there are no segment type indicators displayed.

9/03
Feature Description
PRIMARY PV Value of PV.
PRIMARY SP Value of setpoint.
ELAPSED SEG TIME Time elapsed in the segment
ELAPSED PGM TIME Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
SEG TIME REMAIN Time remaining in the indicated segment.
PV2 Process Variable #2 value, for deviation check.
LOAD Accesses the Load Program display. See Load program (Page 62).
Program must be in READY state.
CLEAR Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY
state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.
EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu. See
Edit segments (Page 65 ). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP
state.
SAVE Accesses the Save Program display. See Save Program (Page 54)
Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.
EVENT # State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.
Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.
F1
RUN
Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

F2
HOLD
Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment.

F3 Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See
RESET SAVE on the display.
Push F4 button to cause the program to jump to the next segment.

F4 Programs in the last segment will jump to the end of the program.
Programs cannot be advanced to the first segment. Current state must
ADV
either READY or HOLD.
Bold items are read-only.

9/03

This display shows live values of a setpoint programmer.
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30
MYPROFILE MY TEST PROFILE
F1
STATE PROF SEG RAMP RUN
RUN # 3 # 2
F2
PRIMARY AUXLABEL HOLD
ENGU ENGU
PV 1450.0 31.0 F3
SP 1449.0 31.1 RESET
SEG TIME REM 01:30:00 F4

PGM ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 ADV
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 21 Single SPP operation - Model 559

Table 18 Single SPP details - Model 559
Feature Description
MY PROFIL Name of the selected profile.
STATE READY: Profile is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All
events are OFF.
HOLD: Profile is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Profile is executing normally.
GHOLD: Profile is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Profile has reached the end of the last segment.
PROF Profile # is the memory location, 1 to 70, of this profile.
SEG Current segment
RAMP or Type of current segment: ramp or soak

SOAK

9/03
Feature Description
Current segment, next segment indicators.
Left box: current segment type.
Right box: next segment type.
Ramp up
Soak
Ramp down
Blank
In Ready state, there are no segment type boxes displayed.
PRIMARY PV Value of PV.
PRIMARY SP Value of setpoint.
AUXILIARY PV (AUX LABEL) Value of auxiliary PV.
AUXILIARY SP (AUX LABEL) Value of auxiliary setpoint.
SEG TIME REM Time remaining in the indicated segment.
PGM ELAPSED TIME Time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
LOAD Accesses the Load Program display. See Load Program (Page 62).
Program must be in READY state.
MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate menu. See SPP operate popup menu
(Page 60).
F1 Push F1 button to start a program that is in HOLD or READY state.

RUN
F2 Push F2 button to put program in HOLD.

HOLD
F3 Push F3 button to reset a HOLD or STOP program to the first segment.

RESET Any edits made to the program are lost unless they were SAVED. See
SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 22).
F4 Causes program to jump to the next segment. Programs in the last

ADV segment will jump to the end of the program. Programs cannot be
advanced to the first segment.

9/03
SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

This menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the program. Some actions require the program to be in
certain states (RUN, READY, etc.).
For Model 1042 Operate details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

MYPROFIL MY TEST PROFILE
F1
RUN # 3 # 2
CLEAR
F2
VIEW EVENTS
PRIMARY AUXLABEL HOLD
ENGU
VIEW DETAIL ENGU
PV 1450.0
EDIT 31.0 F3
SP 1449.0
SAVE 31.1 RESET

LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 22 SPP operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 19 SPP operate details - Model 559
Feature Description
CLEAR Erases the program from the programmer. Program must be in READY
state. Do not clear a program if you need to save it first.
VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See View
program events (page 61).
VIEW DETAIL Displays detailed information on the program. See View program detail
(page 62).
EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu. See
Edit segments (page 65). Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP

state.
SAVE Accesses the Save Program display See Save Program (Page 54).
Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state.
In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the program is in that state. NA means
the action is not available in that state.

9/03
Table 20 SPP popup menu actions according to state
Program State
Action READY RUN HOLD GHOLD STOP DISABLE
CLEAR X NA NA NA NA NA
EDIT X NA X NA X NA
SAVE X NA X NA X NA
View program events - Model 559

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.
For Model 1042 Events - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".

STATE PROF SEG RAMP
RUN # 3 # 2
EVENT #1 OFF EVENT #9 ON
EVENT #2 OFF EVENT #10 OFF
EVENT #3 OFF EVENT #11 ON
EVENT #4 ON EVENT #12 ON
EVENT #6 ON EVENT #14 ON
SEG TIME REM 0:00
Figure 23 View program events - Model 559
Table 21 View program events details - Model 559
Feature Description
MY PROFILE Name of the selected profile.
STATE Current state of program.
PROF # Profile # is the memory location of this profile
SEG # Current segment
RAMP or SOAK Type of current Segment: Ramp or Soak
EVENT # State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.
SEG TIME REM Time remaining in the indicated segment.

9/03
Load program
View program details - Model 559

This display lets you see details on the program time and auxiliary PVs.
For Model 1042 Program Details - See Figure 20 "Single Setpoint Operation - Model 1042".
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG111:30
F1
RUN # 3 # 2
F2
PV 2 PRIMARY AUXLABEL2207.23
HOLD
PV 3 ENGU ENGU 2203.92
ELAPSED
PV SEG TIME 31.0
1450.0 1:15:45F3
ELAPSED
SP PGM TIME 31.1
1449.0 10:36:01
RESET
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 24 View program details - Model 559
Table 22 View program details- Model 559
Feature Description
ELAPSED SEG TIME # Time elapsed in the indicated segment.
ELAPSED PGM TIME # Time elapsed in the program.
SEG TIME REMAIN Time remaining in the indicated segment.
Load program
This menu lets you load a program from memory, using a profile number or selecting from a profile list,
into a setpoint programmer where it can be run or edited.
Table 23 Program load details
Feature Description
CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER Number of program being run by the programmer.
CURRENT PROFILE NAME Name of program being run by the programmer.
CURRENT PROFILE DESCR Description of program being run by the programmer.
LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER Number of profile to be loaded from memory. Load profile number 0 (zero)
will clear the working program. See Figure 25.
LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST Profile number selected from a list of profiles that appears will be loaded
from memory. See Figure 26.

9/03
Load program
Feature Description
SEGMENT NUMBER After loading, the program will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will
start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a loop, the profile
cycles through the looped segments according to the number of loop
cycles.
LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

11:30
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP Program #1 CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 1

CURRENT PROFILE NAME MYPROFIL
RUN 1 1 F1 CURRENT PROFILE DESCR MY TEST PROFILE
PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN contains Profile #1 LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER 3
PV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST
SP 1449.0 ENGU
ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME
31.1 ENGU
0001:30:00
F2
HOLD Step 1 SEGMENT NUMBER 5

RESET Select LOAD
PV2 0
PV3 0
Step 2
LOAD EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
F4
CLEAR EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
ADV
EDIT EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
SAVE EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
Select LOAD FROM
PROFILE NUMBER
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.
Profiles in RAM. Step 3

Profile #1
Step 4
11:30
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP

RUN 3 5
Profile #2
F1
PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN Profile #3 is loaded from RAM
PV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU to Program #1. Program Profile #3
SP 1449.0 ENGU 31.1 ENGU F2
HOLD will start at Segment #5 during .
ELAPSED SEGMENT TIME 0001:30:00 its first run. Subsequent .
ELAPSED PGM TIME
SEG TIME REMAIN
0006:00:00
0000:10:00
F3
runs always start at Segment .
RESET
PV2 0
PV3 0 #1.
LOAD EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
F4
CLEAR EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
ADV
SAVE EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
`
Figure 25 Example of loading a program from a profile number - Model 1042

9/03
Load program
SP PROGRAMMER SPTAG1 MAY 05 LOAD PROFILE TO SPPTAG1

11:30
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP Program #1 CURRENT PROFILE NUMBER 1

RUN 1 1 CURRENT PROFILE NAME MYPROFIL
F1 CURRENT PROFILE DESCR MY TEST PROFILE
PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN contains Profile #1
LOAD FROM PROFILE NUMBER 3
SP 1449.0 ENGU
31.1 ENGU
0001:30:00
F2
HOLD Step 1 LOAD FROM PROFILE LIST
SEGMENT NUMBER 5

RESET Select LOAD
PV2 0
PV3 0
Step 2
LOAD EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
F4
CLEAR EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
ADV
SAVE EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF

Select LOAD FROM ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S HZ RUN
PROFILE LIST
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.
Step 3
Step 4
11:30
PROFILES IN MEMORY
STATE PROFILE SEGMENT RAMP 1 PROFILE NAME
RUN 3 5 F1 2 PROFILE NAME
PRIMARY AUXLABEL RUN Profile #3 is loaded from RAM 3 PROFILE NAME
PV 1450.0 ENGU 31.0 ENGU to Program #1. Program 4 PROFILE NAME
F2
SP 1449.0 ENGU 31.1 ENGU will start at Segment #5 during
HOLD 5 PROFILE NAME
ELAPSED PGM TIME
0001:30:00
0006:00:00
its first run. Subsequent 6 PROFILE NAME
F3
RESET runs always start at Segment 7 PROFILE NAME
PV2 0
PV3 0 #1. 8 PROFILE NAME
LOAD EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
F4 9 PROFILE NAME
CLEAR EV1 OFF EV9 OFF ADV
EDIT
EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF 10 PROFILE NAME
SAVE EV1
EV1
OFF
OFF
EV9
EV9
OFF
OFF
EV1 OFF EV9 OFF
`
Figure 26 Example of loading a program from a profile list - Model 1042

9/03
Edit segments
Edit segments
This menu lets you edit the profile segments of the working program. Edits do not affect profiles in
memory unless you save them.
ATTENTION
Program must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.
Table 24 Edit segments details
Feature Description
F1 - NEXT SEG Press F1 to edit next segment.
F2 - PREV SEG Press F2 to edit previous segment.
REFERENCE PROFILE Number, label, and description of program being edited.
SEGMENT TYPE Ramp or Soak
TIME UNITS Time units of the profile. Minutes or Hours.
RAMP TYPE TIME: Each ramp segments time is the TIME allotted to the profiles
output to reach the next soak segments value in hours or minutes.
OR
RATE: Each ramp segments time specifies the RATE at which that
profiles output will reach the next soak segment, where the rate is
specified in EU/hour or EU/minute.
STARTING VALUE Starting value of the segment.
TIME/RATE Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.99 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.99 min. The function
of this value depends on the Ramp Type.
AUX START VALUE Select a fixed soak value for this segment.

9/03
Edit segments
TIP
Edits are allowed to any segment of the program, including the current segment.
If edit is to current segment and segment is a ramp:
- If the ramp type is edited, then the time remaining is recalculated and the ramp rate is
adjusted accordingly.
- If the ramp rate is edited, then the time remaining is adjusted accordingly.
- Changes to the ramp starting setpoint will be ignored for the current execution of the
segment, but will be used for subsequent execution if the segment is included in a loop.
If edit is to current segment and segment is a soak:
- Changes to the soak setpoint will result in a step change.
- Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is
less than or equal to 0, the program will advance to the next segment upon returning to
RUN state.
If the current segment is a ramp and the starting value of the following segment is changed,
then the time remaining in the ramp segment will be adjusted accordingly but the ramp rate
will remain unchanged.
Edits to soak setpoints will result in a step change at the next segment unless the starting
value of that segment is changed to the same value as well.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Overview
A setpoint schedule produces multiple setpoint outputs on a common time base. A setpoint schedule
contains multiple segments. Each segment contains multiple ramp or soak setpoints, multiple auxiliary soak
outputs, and multiple events. The last segment setpoint must be a soak.
The Setpoint Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory. Any schedule can be edited and
saved in one of the slots in the controllers memory.
A Setpoint guarantee function (known as guaranteed hold) is provided that holds the Scheduler if a process
variable exceeds a predefined deviation from setpoint. Guaranteed hold is set on a per-segment basis and
can be set for high deviation, low deviation, high and low deviation, or none.
The schedule may be changed (with some exceptions) from the current state to a new state by the operator
as well as by inputs to the Scheduler function block in the controller configuration. Table 25 lists the
resulting states.
Table 25 SPS inputs and current state
Input Current State
READY HOLD RUN GHOLD STOP DISABLE
RESET READY READY RUN READY READY READY
HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD STOP HOLD
RUN RUN RUN RUN GHOLD STOP RUN
GHOLD READY HOLD GHOLD GHOLD STOP READY
With regard to changing schedule state, if more than one function block input is on in the same execution
cycle, RESET has priority over HOLD and RUN, and GHOLD has priority over RUN.
Also, function block inputs will override inputs from the Operator Panel which occur during the same
execution cycle. Finally, state changes from the Operator Panel are processed on the basis of the last
change wins.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042
Setpoint Scheduler Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Access
Setpoint Scheduler setup is done through the SP Scheduler menu, accessed through the Main Menu. Press
"Enter" for Select Schedule menu. (Schedule 1 or 2). Press "Enter" again to Edit Schedule.
See also
While operating Setpoint Scheduler functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Topic See Page
Edit Schedule 69
Edit Segments 70
Edit Setpoints 71
Edit Segment Events 72
Edit Guarantee Hold 73
Save Schedule 74
Edit Guarantee Hold Limits 76

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit schedule
Edit schedule
This display lets you edit parameters of the selected schedule. Edits affect only the currently working
schedule, not the schedule in memory, unless you save the schedule.
ATTENTION
Schedule must be in READY state to edit the values on this display.
Table 26 Edit schedule details
Feature Description
EDIT SEGMENTS Accesses Edit Segments menu (page 70) where you can edit each
segment.
SAVE SCHEDULE Saves changes you make to this display. Schedule is saved in the
controllers schedule memory where it can be loaded and run later.
LABEL Identifies the schedule with text.
TIME UNITS This selection assigns the time units (hours or minutes) for the schedule.
JOG SEGMENT Segment to which the schedule will jump to when the JOG discrete input
is pulsed.
EDIT GUAR HOLD LIMITS Accesses Edit Guarantee Hold Limits display (page 76) where you can
edit guaranteed hold limits for each setpoint.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segments
Edit segments
This menu lets you specify segment parameters. Edits do not affect schedules in memory unless you save
them.
ATTENTION
Schedule must be in READY or STOP state before segments can be edited from this menu.
Table 27 Edit segment details
Feature Description
F1 - NEXT SEG Select this to edit next segment.

F2 - PREV SEG Select this to edit previous segment.
EDITING SCHEDULE # Number of schedule being edited.
TIME Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.
RECYCLE COUNT Number of recycles left
RECYCLE SEGMENT # Recycle segment number
EDIT SETPOINTS Select this to edit the segment setpoints. See Edit setpoints (page 71).
EDIT EVENTS Select this to edit the segment events. See Edit segment events (page
72).
EDIT GUARANTEE HOLD Select this to edit the segments guarantee hold settings. See Edit
guarantee hold (page 73).

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit setpoints
Edit setpoints
This lets you edit the setpoints (8 main and 8 auxiliary) of any segment in the schedule.
Table 28 Edit setpoints details
Feature Description
SPLABEL1 SP1 123456.7 ENGU Listed are each setpoints label, identifier, value, and engineering units.
Select a setpoint value to change, then press Enter to save the change.
.
.
.
SPLABEL8 SP8 123456.7 ENGU
AXLABEL1 AX1 123456.7 ENGU Press "Page Down" to list the auxiliary setpoints. Listed are each auxiliary
setpoints label, identifier, value, and engineering units. Select a setpoint
. value to change, then press Enter to save the change.
.
.
AXLABEL8 AX8 123456.7 ENGU

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segment events
Edit segment events

This lets you edit the state of up to 16 events for the selected segment. You can configure 1 to 16 segment
events to turn ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment. Segment events are digital switches that
provide ON/OFF outputs. When a segment event is turned ON, it remains ON until the end of the segment
at which time it is turned OFF unless it is configured to turn ON in the next segment.
Table 29 Edit segment events details
Feature Description
EVENT #1 16 ON or OFF
TIP
Events can be edited only while schedule is in READY state.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit guarantee hold
Edit guarantee hold

This lets you specify the conditions under which a segment will GHOLD when deviation exceeds the
guarantee hold limits. If any setpoints guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire schedule enters GHOLD
state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current value or state) until none
of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.
Table 30 Edit guarantee hold details
Feature Description
SPLABEL SP1 OFF: Segment will not GHOLD when the PV deviates from SP by its
guarantee hold limit.
.
. HIGH: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above SP by more than the
. SP guarantee hold limit.
SPLABEL SP8 LOW: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates below SP by more than the SP
guarantee hold limit.
HI/LO: Segment will GHOLD if PV deviates above or below SP by more

than the SP guarantee hold limit.
See also
See Edit guarantee hold limits (page 76).

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Save schedule
Save schedule
This function saves a schedule to the controllers schedule memory. It is accessed through the main menu
or through the Scheduler Popup menu. The Scheduler can run any of the schedules in controller memory.
You can choose to save a schedule back to controller memory after editing it. See Figure 27.
Table 31 Schedule save details
Feature Description
CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER The number, name, and description of the schedule currently loaded into
CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME the scheduler.
CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR
SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER There are slots available in memory for schedules.
ATTENTION: You will overwrite any schedule in the slot. Select the
desired slot and press Enter to save the schedule. The schedule is also
saved in the Scheduler.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Schedule function has
been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100
and later).
SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Schedule function has been disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).
Schedules in RAM
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30 SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30
STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN

Schedule #1 STATE
READY # 2
SEG RECYCLES REMAIN
READY
RUN # 2 100
RUN 100 F1 F1
RUN START RUN
Schedule #2
1
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00 SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00
HOLD F2
F2 SP PV
SP PV
HOLD RESET
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
HOLD
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
Schedule #3 SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU SP2 SPLABEL2CLEAR
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
. Schedule #3 SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3 SP3 SPLABEL3ADVANCE

1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU RESET
. was previously SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU
RESET
SP5 SPLABEL5VIEW EVENTS
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP6 SPLABEL6VIEW AUX
. loaded into SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
F4
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
F4
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU EDIT ADV
the Scheduler. SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU ADV SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
LOAD
LOAD LOAD
SAVE
2 MORE COMMANDS MORE COMMANDS
Select MORE COMMANDS ...then select SAVE.
5 Scheduler now contains

Schedule #2.
4
Schedules in RAM
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30 Schedule #3 is saved as SAVE SCHEDULE
STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN Schedule #2 in RAM. CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER 3
READY # 2 100 F1 Schedule #1 SAVE TO SCHEDULE NUMBER 2
RUN
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00
Schedule #2
SP
PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU
F2
HOLD
Schedule #3
Select SAVE TO
3
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
.
SCHEDULE # 2
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU
.
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU
F4
ADV .
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 27 Example of saving a schedule

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Save schedule

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Save schedule
Edit guarantee hold limits

This lets you specify the amount of deviation needed between a setpoint and its PV for the schedule to
automatically switch to GHOLD state. If any setpoints guarantee hold limit is exceeded, the entire
schedule enters GHOLD state (all setpoints, auxiliary setpoints, and segment events freeze on their current
value or state) until none of the limits are exceeded, whereupon the schedule will resume RUN state.
Table 32 Edit guarantee hold limits details
Feature Description
SPLABEL1 SP1 For each setpoint, enter the minimum amount of deviation between the
Setpoint and PV that will GHOLD the schedule.
.
.
.
SPLABEL8 SP8
See also
See Edit guarantee hold (page 73).

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint Schedule Operation
Setpoint Schedule Operation

Overview
1 5 8
The Setpoint schedule operation display is accessed by the Display Group keys through [ ].
See also
While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Topic See Page
Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 1042 78
Setpoint Schedule Operation - Model 559 80
Scheduler Popup Menu - Model 559 82
Load Schedule 84
View Scheduler Events 86
View Auxiliary Data 87
Edit Schedule Segments 88
Security
When Security is enabled, (See Set Security) the SPS operate display works as follows:

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.
There are selections on the display that let you adjust and view parameters of the schedule.
SP SCHEDULER SPSTAG1 MAY 05
MYSCHED MY TEST SCHEDULE 11:30
STATE SCHED SEG RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN 3 2 0
SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00 F1
SP PV RUN
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU F2
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU HOLD
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
F3
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
RESET
LOAD
CLEAR
VIEW EVENTS F4
VIEW AUX
EDIT
ADV
SAVE
Figure 28 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 1042

Table 33 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 1042
Feature Description
SPSTAG1 Name of the selected Scheduler block.
MYSCHED Name of the selected schedule.
MY TEST SCHEDULE Description of the selected schedule.
STATE READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All
events are OFF.
HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Schedule is executing normally.
GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.
DISABLE: Schedule is prevented from starting until the Scheduler disable
control is ON.
SCHED Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.
SEG Current segment
RECYCLES REMAIN Number of recycles remaining, according to the highest numbered

segment so far encountered in the schedule.
Example:
Segment #30 has recycle count = 10 and recycle segment #5. Therefore,
the first time the schedule reaches Segment #30, the schedule will recycle
(repeat) Segments #5 through #30 ten times. During the first recycling,
RECYCLES REMAIN will display 10, during the second recycling it will
display 9, etc.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Feature Description
SEG REMAIN Time remaining in the current segment.
TOTAL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
SP Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.
PV Each PV value is shown under this heading.
LOAD Accesses the Load Schedule display (page 80). Schedule must be in
READY state.
CLEAR Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY
state. Attention: If you clear a schedule you cant save it.
VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View
Schedule Events" (Page 86 )
VIEW AUX Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs.
See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 87 )
EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in
READY, HOLD, or STOP state.
SAVE Accesses the Save Schedule display (page 74). Schedule must be in
Push F1 button to start a schedule that is in HOLD or READY state.

F1
RUN
Push F2 button to put schedule in HOLD.

F2
HOLD
Push F3 button to reset a HOLD, GHOLD, or STOP schedule to the first

F3 segment. Any edits made to the schedule are lost unless they were
RESET SAVED. See SAVE on the display.
Push F4 to cause the schedule to jump to the next segment. Schedules in

F4 the last segment will jump to the end of the schedule. Schedules cannot
ADV be advanced to the first segment.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler

This display shows live values of a setpoint scheduler.
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30

RUN # 2 100 F1
RUN
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00
SP PV F2
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU HOLD
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F4
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU ADV
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 29 Setpoint schedule operation - Model 559

Table 34 Setpoint schedule operation details - Model 559
Feature Description
MY SCHED Name of the selected schedule.
SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location, 1 to 10, of this schedule.
SPSTAG1 Name of the selected schedule block.
STATE READY: Schedule is at the beginning of segment and is ready to run. All
events are OFF.
HOLD: Schedule is paused at the setpoint value shown.
RUN: Schedule is executing normally.
GHOLD: Schedule is paused because of excessive deviation.
STOP: Schedule has reached the end of the last segment.
SEG # Current segment

Example:
display 9, etc.
SEG REM Time remaining in the current segment.
TOTL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
SP Each setpoint value in the current segment is shown under this heading.
PV Each PV value is shown under this heading.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Feature Description
LOAD Accesses the Load Schedule display (Page 84). Schedule must be in
READY state.
MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate menu (Page 82)

F1
RUN

F2
HOLD

RESET SAVED. See SAVE on the popup menu (Figure 30).


9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Scheduler popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the schedule. Some
actions require the schedule to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 35.
SPSTAG1 SCHED3 MYSCHED 11:30

RUN # 2 100 F1
RUN
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00
F2
SP PV
HOLD
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
CLEAR
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
VIEW
SP5 SPLABEL5 EVENTS
1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
VIEW
SP6 SPLABEL6 AUX1234567.8
1234567.8 ENGU
F4
EDIT 1234567.8 ENGU
ADV
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SAVE
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 30 Scheduler operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 35 Scheduler operate popup details - Model 559
Feature Description
CLEAR Erases the schedule from the scheduler. Schedule must be in READY
state. Do not clear a schedule if you need to save it first.
VIEW EVENTS Displays the status of 16 events associated with this segment. See "View
Schedule Events" (Page 86)
VIEW AUX Displays the name and value of the 8 auxiliary setpoints and their PVs.
See "View Auxiliary Data" (Page 87 )
EDIT Displays the Edit Segment menu (Figure 35). Schedule must be in
SAVE Accesses the Save Schedule display (Figure 27). Schedule must be in

F1
RUN

F2
HOLD

RESET SAVED. See SAVE on the display.


9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
In the following table, X indicates the action can be performed when the schedule is in that state. NA
means the action is not available in that state.
Table 36 SPS popup menu actions according to state
Schedule state
Action READY RUN HOLD GHOLD STOP DISABLE
CLEAR X NA NA NA NA NA
EDIT X NA X NA X NA
SAVE X NA X NA X NA

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Load schedule
Load schedule
This menu lets you load a schedule from memory into a setpoint scheduler where it can be run or edited.
Table 37 Schedule load details
Feature Description
CURRENT SCHEDULE NUMBER Number, name, description of schedule being run by the scheduler.
CURRENT SCHEDULE NAME
CURRENT SCHEDULE DESCR
LOAD FROM SCHEDULE NUMBER Number of schedule to be loaded from memory. Loading schedule number
0 (zero) will clear the working schedule.
LOAD FROM SCHEDULE LIST Schedule number, when selected from a list of schedules, will be loaded
from memory.
SEGMENT NUMBER After loading, the schedule will start at this segment. Subsequent runs will
start at Segment #1. If the segment number is within a recycle loop, the
schedule cycles through the recycled segments according to the number of
recycles.
SPSTAG1 SCHED 1 MYSCHED 11:30 Scheduler

STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN contains SCHEDULE #1 LOAD SCHEDULE
RUN
READY # 2 100 F1
RUN
CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00 LABEL678
SP
PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
F2
ENGUHOLD
ENGU
1 Select LOAD LOAD FROM SCHED NUM
SEGMENT NUMBER
3
5
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGURESET
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGU ADV
2
LOAD Select LOAD FROM
MORE COMMANDS SCHEDULE NUMBER
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.
Schedules in RAM.
11:30
SCHEDULE #1
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED
STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN SCHEDULE #2
RUN
READY # 5 100 F1
RUN Schedule #3 is loaded from
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00 RAM to Schedule #1. SCHEDULE #3
SP PV F2
Schedule will start at Segment .
HOLD
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
#5 during its first run. .
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3 Subsequent runs always start .
3
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
RESET
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU at Segment #1.
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F4
ENGUADV
4
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 31 Example of loading a schedule from schedule number

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Load schedule
SPSTAG1 SCHED 1 MYSCHED 11:30 Scheduler

STATE SEG RECYCLES REMAIN contains SCHEDULE #1 LOAD SCHEDULE
RUN
READY # 2 100 F1
RUN CURRENT SCHED NUMBER 1
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00 LABEL678
SP
PV
1234567.8
1234567.8
F2
ENGU HOLD
ENGU
1 Select LOAD
LOAD FROM SCHED NUMBER
LOAD FROM SCHED LIST
3
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3 SEGMENT NUMBER 5

SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGURESET
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
1234567.8
1234567.8
1234567.8
ENGU
ENGU F4
ENGU ADV
2
LOAD Select LOAD FROM
MORE COMMANDS SCHEDULE LIST
and
SEGMENT NUMBER.
Schedules in RAM.
SCHEDULES IN MEMORY
SPSTAG1 SCHED 3 MYSCHED 11:30
SPSTAG01
SCHEDULE 1 LABEL DESCRIPTOR
RUN
READY # 5 100 F1
RUN Schedule #3 is loaded from SCHEDULE 2 LABEL DESCRIPTOR
SCHEDULE 3 LABEL DESCRIPTOR
SEG REM 0000:00:00 TOTL 0000:00:00 RAM to Scheduler. SCHEDULE 4 LABEL DESCRIPTOR
F2
SP PV Schedule will start at Segment SCHEDULE 5 LABEL DESCRIPTOR
SP1 SPLABEL1 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGUHOLD
SP2 SPLABEL2 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU #5 during its first run.
SP3 SPLABEL3 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F3
SP4 SPLABEL4 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
RESET
Subsequent runs always start
SP5 SPLABEL5 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU at Segment #1.
SP6 SPLABEL6 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU
SP7 SPLABEL7 1234567.8 1234567.8 ENGU F4
ENGUADV
4 3
SP8 SPLABEL8 1234567.8 1234567.8
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 32 Example of loading a schedule from schedule list

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
View schedule events
View schedule events

This display lets you see the status of up to 16 events associated with each segment.

STATE SCHED SEGMENT RECYCLES REMAIN

RUN 3 2 0
SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00
EV1 SPS1EV1 OFF EV9 SPS1EV1 ON
Figure 33 View schedule events
Table 38 View schedule events details
Feature Description
SPSTAG1 Name of selected schedule block
SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.
MY TEST SCHEDULE Description of selected schedule.
SEG # Current segment.

Example
display 9, etc.
SEG REM Time remaining in the current segment.
TOTL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
EV# EVENTxxx State of 16 events associated with this segment. ON or OFF.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
View auxiliary data
View auxiliary data

This display lets you see details on the schedule auxiliary setpoints and PVs.

RUN 3 2 0
SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00
SP PV
AUX1 SPS1AUX1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX2 SPS1AUX2 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX3 SPS1AUX3 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX4 SPS1AUX4 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX5 SPS1AUX5 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX6 SPS1AUX6 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX7 SPS1AUX7 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
AUX8 SPS1AUX8 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
Figure 34 View auxiliary data
Table 39 View auxiliary data details
Feature Description
SPSTAG1 Name of the selected scheduler block.
SCHED # Schedule # is the memory location of this schedule.
SEG # Current segment.

Example
display 9, etc.
SEG REMAIN Time remaining in the current segment.
TOTAL Total schedule time elapsed in RUN, HOLD, and GHOLD states.
AUX# AXLABEL Labels of the 8 auxiliary setpoints
SP Under the SP heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary setpoints.
PV Under the PV heading are listed the values of the 8 auxiliary PVs.

9/03
Setpoint Scheduler
Edit segments
Edit segments
This menu lets you edit the schedule segments of the working schedule. Edits do not affect schedules in
memory unless you save them.
ATTENTION
Schedule must be in READY, HOLD, or STOP state before segments can be edited.
SPS SCHEDULE EDIT SEGMENT

F1 - NEXT SEG F2 - PREV SEG
EDITING SCHEDULE # 3LABEL
SEGMENT # 10
TIME UNIT HOURS
TIME 0.000
EDIT SETPOINTS
Figure 35 Edit segments

Table 40 Edit segments details
Feature Description
F1 - NEXT SEG Select this to edit next segment.
F2 - PREV SEG Select this to edit previous segment.
EDITING SCHEDULE # LABEL Number and label of schedule being edited.
TIME UNITS Time units of the schedule. Minutes or Hours.
TIME Range = 0.00 hr. to 9999.999 hr. or 0.00 min. to 9999.999 min.
EDIT SETPOINTS Lets you edit the segment setpoints.
TIP
Edits are allowed to any segment of the schedule, including the current segment.
If edit is to current segment:
Changes to the setpoint will result in a step change.

Changes to the time will cause recalculation of the segment time remaining. If the result is
less than or equal to 0, the schedule will advance to the next segment.
If the starting value of the following segment is changed (F1-NEXT SEG), then the ramp rate
in the current segment will be adjusted accordingly but the time remaining will remain
unchanged.

9/03
Sequencers
Overview
The Sequencer function block controls the states of up to 16 digital outputs and one analog output. Each
combination of output states represents a "State of the Sequencer block, such as PURGE, FILL, HEAT, or
COOL. Each function block supports up to 50 States. These states are set up, by the user, during the
configuration of the function block.
The user-configurable program that runs within the Sequencer function block is called a Sequence. Each
Sequence contains up to 64 Steps; each Step activates one of the 50 States supported by the function
block. Note that the same State can be used by more than one Step within a Sequence.
Each Step within a Sequence may be configured to advance to any other Step based on time (hours or
minutes), digital event (2 per Step), or manual advance. A separate jog function is also provided.
The controller maintains a pool of 20 user-configurable Sequences in its memory. The Sequences in the
pool can be assigned to run within any of the Sequencer function blocks. Once it has been loaded into a
Sequencer function block, a Sequence can be modified through the menus provided on this Operator
Interface. A modified Sequence can also be saved back to the pool for later recall, if desired.

9/03
Sequencers
Sequencer Setup - Model 559 and 1042

Overview
The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit the Sequences that are currently loaded into one of the
available Sequencer function blocks. After editing the Sequence you can save it back to the pool of
Sequences for later recall, if desired. Note that you can only edit the Sequence from this menu if the
Sequencer function block is in the READY or STOP mode.
The Sequencer menu lets you view and edit sequences in controller memory. Operating sequences are not
affected. For viewing and editing live sequences, see Sequencer Operation on page 98.
Access
Main Menu: Sequencers.
See also
While operating Sequencers, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message descriptions.
Topic See Page
Edit Sequence 91
Edit Steps 92
Edit Step Details 93
View Step Details 94
View Sequence Outputs 95
Select State 96
Save Sequence 97

9/03
Sequencers
Edit Sequence
Table 41 Edit Sequence
Feature Description
EDIT STEPS Displays Edit Steps screen. See page 92.
SAVE SEQUENCE Saves a sequence to controller memory. Press Enter. "Save Sequencer" screen lets you
"Save to Sequence Number". See Page 97
SEQUENCE NAME Allows edits to sequence name.
SEQUENCE Allows edits to sequence description.

DESCRIPTION
TIME UNITS Select hours or minutes.
JOG TO STEP Select a step number. When the sequencers JOG input is triggered, the sequencer will
jump to the start of this step then continue.

9/03
Sequencers
Edit Steps
SEQUENCE 1 - SEQLABEL SEQDESCR MAY06

11:30
PAGE 1 OF 4 CURRENT STEP - 11
OUTPUTS NEXT STEP
STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TIMER EV1 EV2 ADV
1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
EDIT STEP DETAILS
VIEW STEP DETAILS
Figure 36 Edit Sequence Steps (Model 1042 Example)
Table 42 Edit Sequence Steps
Feature Description
STEP Step number
STATE Name of state
OUTPUTS 1 - 16 Output states: 1 or 0.

(Model 1042 only)
TIMER When the timer duration expires, the sequence will jump to this step.
EV1 When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.
ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.
EDIT STEP DETAILS Lets you edit step details. See page 93.
VIEW STEP DETAILS Displays detailed popup window. See page 94.

9/03
Sequencers
Edit Step Details

Edits are allowed only when the Sequencer function block is in the Ready or Stop mode.
If you specify a next step of zero, the Sequence will STOP when its next step trigger is received. For
example, if Step 1 has a Timer Duration of one minute and a Timer Next Step of zero, the Sequence will
stay in Step 1 for one minute and then STOP.
If you specify a Timer Duration value of zero, the Sequence will remain at that Step until Event 1 or Event
2 occurs, or an Advance input or command is received.
Table 43 Edit Step Details
Feature Description
F1 NEXT STEP Displays next step.
F2 PREV STEP Displays previous step.
F3 GO TO STEP Displays chosen step.
SEQUENCE NUMBER Sequence number.
SEQUENCE NAME Sequence name.
SEQUENCE Sequence description.

DESCRIPTION
TIME UNITS Hours or Minutes
SELECT STATE Displays the Select State popup window. See page 96. Available only from main menu.
TIMER DURATION Length of the step in time units.
AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output.
TIMER NEXT STEP When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.
EVENT 1 NEXT When Event 1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.
STEP
EVENT 2 NEXT When Event 2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.
STEP
ADVANCE NEXT When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.
STEP

9/03
Sequencers
View Step Details

Press Esc to remove the View Step Details popup window.

11:30
OUTPUTS STEP 1
STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STATE
1 STATE001LABL 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIMER DURATION
3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000:01:06
AUX OUTPUT
4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
100.0
5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NEXT STEP
6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TIMER - 2
7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EV 1 - 3
8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EV 2 - 4
9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADV - 2
10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EVENT 1
11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME1
12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EVENT 2
13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME2
14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS ENTER
15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FOR OUTPUTS
16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F1 - NEXT STEP
VIEW STEP DETAILS F2 - PREV STEP
F3 - GO TO STEP
EDIT STEP DETAILS
Table 44 View Sequence Step Details (Model 1042 Example)
Feature Description
STEP Step number
STATE State name
TIMER DURATION Duration of state (hours or minutes)
NEXT STEP TIMER When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.
NEXT STEP EVENT1 When Event1 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.
NEXT STEP EVENT2 When Event2 is triggered the sequence will jump to this step.
NEXT STEP ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.
PRESS ENTER FOR Displays a popup window for the outputs. See page 95.
OUTPUTS
F1 NEXT STEP Press F1 to view the next steps details.
F2 PREV STEP Press F2 to view the previous steps details.
F3 GO TO STEP Press F3 to select any step and view its details.

9/03
Sequencers
View Sequence Outputs

Press Esc to remove the Output popup window.

11:30
OUTPUTS STEP 1
STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STATE
1 STATE001LABL 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STATE001LABL
2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OUTPUTS
1 OUTLBL01 ON
3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 OUTLBL02 OFF
6 OUTLBL06 OFF
7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 OUTLBL07 OFF
11 OUTLBL11 OFF
11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 OUTLBL12 OFF
ENTER:DETAILS
16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F1 - NEXT STEP
VIEW STEP DETAILS F2 - PREV STEP
F3 - GO TO STEP
EDIT STEP DETAILS
Table 45 View Sequence Step Outputs (Model 1042 Example)
Feature Description
STEP Step number
STATE State name
OUTPUTS 1 - 16 The configured state of the function blocks 16 outputs.
ENTER: DETAILS Press Enter to return to the View Details popup screen. See page 94.
F1 NEXT STEP Press F1 to view the next steps details..
F2 PREV STEP Press F2 to view the previous steps details.
F3 GO TO STEP Press F3 to select any step and view its details.

9/03
Sequencers
Select State
Lets you select which state to assign to the step.
A unique State, State 0, can be used to indicate the last step in a Sequence. The Sequencer function
block will go to Stop mode when it encounters any Step whose State is State 0. State 0 is the first item
shown on Page 1 of the Select State popup windows.
EDIT STEP 1
F1 - NEXT STEP
F2 - PREV STEP SELECT STATE
F3 - PAGE
GO TO 1 STEP
OF 4
SEQUENCE NUMBER 1
STATE 1 4 8 12 16 EVENT 1 EVENT 2
SEQUENCE NAME
- 1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --
SEQNCABC
--
SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
- 2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0MAKEPRODUCTXYZ
0 0 0 TAGNAME1 TAGNAME2
TIME- 3UNITS MINUTES
STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME3 TAGNAME4
- 4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME5 --
SELECT STATE
- 5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0STATE001LABL
-- --
TIMER- 6 DURATION 1.1
STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TAGNAME6 TAGNAME7
AUX --OUTPUT
7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
--
--
--
100.0
--
TIMER- 9 NEXT STEP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --
STATE009LABL -- 2
EVENT 1 NEXT STEP
- 10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 3
EVENT 2 NEXT STEP 4

ADVANCE NEXT STEP 2
Table 46 Select State
Feature Description
STATE Lists all possible states you can assign to the step. Page up and down
to see all choices. Move cursor up or down to the desired state, press
Enter to select.
1 4 8 12 16 (Model 1042) Headings indicating the digital outputs of the block.
1 5 9 16 (Model 559)
EVENT 1 (Model 1042 only) Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a
specified step.
EVENT 2 (Model 1042 only) Name of the discrete signal that will cause the sequence to jump to a
specified step.

9/03
Sequencers
Save Sequence
Save Sequence
This function saves a sequence to the controllers sequencer memory. It is accessed through the main menu
or through the Sequencer Popup menu. The Sequencer can run any of the sequences in controller memory.
You can choose to save a sequence back to controller memory after editing it.
Table 47 Sequence save details
Feature Description
CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER The number, name, and description of the sequence currently loaded into
CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME the sequencer.
CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR
SAVE TO SEQUENCE NUMBER There are slots available in memory for sequences.
ATTENTION: You will overwrite any sequence in the slot. Select the
desired slot and press Enter to save the sequence. The sequence is also
saved in the sequencer.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the Save Sequence function has
been disabled via the HC Designer configuration software (Version 2.100
and later).
SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED The Save Sequence function has been disabled via the HC Designer
configuration software (Version 2.100 and later).

9/03
Sequencers
Sequencer Operation
Sequencer Operation
Overview
1 5 8
The Sequencer operation display is accessed by the Display Group keys through ,[ ].
See also
While performing setpoint schedule operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Topic See Page
Sequencer Operation - Model 1042 99
Sequencer Operation - Model 559 100
Sequencer Popup Menu - Model 559 101
Load Sequencer 102
View/Edit Sequence 103
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details 104
Security
When Security is enabled, (See Set Security) the Sequencer operate display works as follows:

9/03
Sequencers
Sequencer Operation - Model 1042

Access
1 5 8
Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys through [ ].
Sequencer Operation Display

SEQUENCER SEQBLOK1 12:30
SEQUENCE 20 COGS SEQ Description
STATE HEATING F1
RUN
STEP 1 MODE RUN
STEP STEP SEQUENCE F2
ELAPSED TIME TIME REMAINING ELAPSED TIME HOLD
0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0
AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF

F3
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60 STATE 4 RESET
VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
LOAD SEQUENCE
EDIT STEPS F4
SAVE SEQUENCE ADV
CLEAR SEQUENCE
Figure 37 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 1042

Table 48 Sequencer Operation - Model 1042
Feature Description
SEQBLOK1 Name of the selected Sequencer block.
COQS Name of the selected sequence.
SEQ Description Description of the selected sequence.
STATE Name of the currently active State.
STEP n Current step number.
MODE Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.
STEP ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.
STEP TIME REMAINING Time remaining in the current Step.
SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.
AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the
Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.
F1 RUN Runs the sequence.
F2 HOLD Holds the sequence.
F3 RESET Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.
F4 ADV Advances to the indicated step.
VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 92.
LOAD SEQUENCE Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer
function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 102.
EDIT STEPS Lets you edit step details. See page 93.
SAVE SEQUENCE Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 97.
CLEAR SEQUENCE Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another sequence
you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.

9/03
Sequencers

Access
1 5 8
Sequencer operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys through [ ].
Sequencer Operation Display

SEQUENCE 20 COGS SEQ Description F1

RUN
STATE HEATING
STEP 1 MODE READY F2
HOLD
STEP ELAPSED TIME 0000:00:00.0
STEP TIME REMAINING 0000:00:00.0
SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME 0000:00:00.0 F3
RESET
AUX OUTPUT - AUX NAME 124.6 DEGF
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60 STATE 4
LOAD SEQUENCE F4
ADV
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 38 Sequencer Operation Display - Model 559
Table 49 Sequencer Operation - Model 559
Feature Description
STATE Name of the currently active State.
STEP n Current step number.
MODE Current mode of sequence. RUN, HOLD, STOP, READY.
STEP ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of step not including time in HOLD.
STEP TIME REMAINING Time remaining in the current Step.
SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME Elapsed time of Sequence since it was started, including time in HOLD.
AUX OUTPUT Value of auxiliary analog output for the current step.
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP n Press F4 to advance to the indicated step. Note that you must place the
Sequencer in Hold mode to use the Advance button.
F1 RUN Runs the sequence.
F2 HOLD Holds the sequence.
F3 RESET Resets the sequence. This erases any edits that were made but not saved.
F4 ADV Advances to the indicated step.
LOAD SEQUENCE Loads a sequence from sequence number or sequence list into the Sequencer
function block. Once loaded you can run or edit the sequence. See Page 102
MORE COMMANDS Accesses the Popup Operate Menu. See page 101
9/03
Sequencers
Sequencer popup menu - Model 559

By choosing MORE COMMANDS, this menu lets you adjust and view parameters of the sequencer. Some
actions require the sequencer to be in certain states (RUN, READY, etc.). See Table 50
SEQUENCE 20 COGS SEQ Description F1

RUN
STATE HEATING
STEP 1 MODE READY F2
HOLD
STEP ELAPSED TIME 0000:00:00.0
STEP TIME REMAINING 0000:00:00.0
CLEAR
SEQUENCE ELAPSED TIME 0000:00:00.0 F3
EDIT STEPS RESET
AUX OUTPUT - VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
124.6
SAVE 60 STATE 4
F4 ADVANCES TO STEP
LOAD SEQUENCE F4
ADV
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 39 Sequencer operate popup menu - Model 559

Table 50 Sequencer operate popup details - Model 559
Feature Description
CLEAR Erases the sequence from the sequencer. After a clear, to run another
sequence you must load one first with LOAD SEQUENCE.
EDIT STEPS Lets you edit step details. See page 104
VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE Lets you view/edit the sequence. See page 102
SAVE Saves the current sequence to controller memory. See Page 97
9/03
Sequencers
Load Sequencer
Load Sequencer
This menu lets you load a sequence from a sequence number or sequence list to a sequencer where it can be
run or edited.
Table 51 Schedule load details
Feature Description
CURRENT SEQUENCE NUMBER Number, name, description of sequence being run by the sequencer.
CURRENT SEQUENCE NAME
CURRENT SEQUENCE DESCR
LOAD FROM SEQUENCE NUMBER Number of sequence to be loaded from memory. Loading sequence
number 0 (zero) will clear the working sequence.
LOAD FROM SEQUENCE LIST Sequence number, when selected from a list of sequences, will be loaded
from memory.
STEP NUMBER After loading, the sequence will start at this step. Subsequent runs will start
at step #1. If the step number is within a recycle loop, the sequencer cycles
through the recycled steps according to the number of recycles.
9/03
Sequencers
View/Edit Sequence
View/Edit Sequence
PAGE 1 OF 4 CURRENT STEP - 11 11:30

OUTPUTS NEXT STEP
STEP STATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TIMER EV1 EV2 ADV
1 STATE001LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
2 STATE002LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
3 STATE003LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
4 STATE004LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
5 STATE005LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
6 STATE006LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
7 STATE007LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
8 STATE008LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
9 STATE009LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
10 STATE010LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
11 STATE011LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
12 STATE012LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
13 STATE013LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
14 STATE014LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
15 STATE015LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
16 STATE016LABL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 2
EDIT STEP DETAILS
VIEW STEP DETAILS
Figure 40 Edit Sequence Steps
Table 52 Edit Sequence Steps
Feature Description
STEP Step number
STATE Name of state
OUTPUTS 1 - 16 Output states: 1 or 0.
TIMER When the timer duration expires the sequence will jump to this step.
ADV When manually advanced the sequence will jump to this step.
EDIT STEP DETAILS Lets you edit step details. See page 104.
VIEW STEP DETAILS Displays detailed popup window. See page 94.
9/03
Sequencers
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details
Edit Steps/Edit Step Details

This menu can be accessed directly from the Sequencer Operation display or from the View/Edit Sequence
display.
The items on this menu cannot be edited while the function block is in the Run mode.
Table 53 Edit Step Details
Feature Description
F1 NEXT STEP Displays next step.
F2 PREV STEP Displays previous step.
F3 GO TO STEP Displays chosen step.
SEQUENCE NUMBER Sequence number.
SEQUENCE NAME Sequence name.
SEQUENCE Sequence description.

DESCRIPTION
TIME UNITS Hours or Minutes
TIMER DURATION Length of the step in time units.
ATTENTION
F3 Reset erases all edits unless you save them first.
9/03
Loops
Overview
The two main tasks associated with loops are setup and operation. Setup is done through the Loop menu
and is described in Loop Setup. Operation is done through various loop displays accessed through the
1
Display Group keys through 5
[ 8
] and is described in Loop Operation.
Loop modes
All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in
Table 54.
Table 54 Loop modes
Loop mode Meaning
AUTO RSP Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.
MAN RSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.
IMAN RSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.
Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade
output is tracking Secondary Cascades PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.
LO RSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value.
Remote Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override Status Is ON.
AUTO LSP Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.
MAN LSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.
IMAN LSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only.
Figure 41. Secondary Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade
output is tracking Secondary Cascades PV. Local Setpoint is selected.
LO LSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value.
Local Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.
PID Primary PID Secondary

RSP
BCI BCO
When PID Secondary is in Manual

or when Local Setpoint is selected,
PID Primary mode is IMAN. IMAN
causes the PID Primary output to
track the PID Secondary PV.
Figure 41 IMAN loop mode
9/03
Loops

Loop Function See page
Common Loop Tasks 108
Loop Setup 108
Loop trend 109
Loop Autotune 110
Loop tune constants 111
Loop control setup 112
Carbon parameters 113
Loop alarm setpoints 114
Loop limits 115
Loop Operation Displays 117
Loop summary 118
Loop control 119
Multiloop faceplate 120
1 loop numeric 121
Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen 122
Loop Tune Constants display 123
A/M bias 124
Common Loop Tasks

You can do these tasks from any live loop display.
Table 55 Common loop tasks
Task How to do it
To manually change a control loops output or setpoint Model 1042 only:

value Use the numeric keys 0 thru 9 to manually enter a
value. Press Enter to accept the value, press
ESC
Escape to leave it unchanged.
Model 559/1042:
Press Increment or Decrement to manually
select a value. Changes to a value are done live and do
not require pressing Enter, you can not cancel the
ESC
changes by pressing Escape .
9/03
Loops
Common Loop Tasks
Task How to do it
To adjust a loops setpoint, output, or switch between 1. Access a display that has a cursor around the loop tag
Local and Remote setpoints
at the top of the display. If mutliple loops, press Tab
to move cursor to the desired loop tag.
2. Press Detail to move between the loop tag, SP

value, and Output value (if in Manual).
3. Adjust values according to previous task.
4. With cursor on the loop tag, press Enter to jump

to that loops control screen:
LOOP CONTROL
LOOPTAG1 AUTO LSP ENGU
TYPE PID
PV 1234567
OUTPUT 1234567
LOCAL SP 1234567
REMOTE SP 1234567
SWITCH SP
See Loop control (page 119).
To toggle a selected loop between AUTO and

MANUAL Press Auto/Manual
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop Setup
Access
Main menu.
Select loop
Select a loop. The loop menu for that loop will appear.
See also
While performing Loop menu functions, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message
descriptions.
Loop menu
Items on the Loop menu are visibile according to the loop type.
Table 56 Loop menu visibility
Loop type
Menu item PID ON/OFF 3 POS CARBON A/M BIAS
LOOP TREND X X X
AUTOTUNE X X X
TUNE CONSTANTS X X X
CONTROL SETUP X X X X X
CARBON PARAMETERS X
ALARM SETPOINTS X X X X X
LIMITS X X X X X
HIGH OUTPUT LIMITING X X
X indicates item is visible
Select one of the following functions from the Select Loop Menu.
Loop Function See page
Loop Trend 109
Autotune 110
Tune Constants 111
Control Setup 112
Carbon Parameters 113
Alarm Setpoints 114
Limits 115
High Output Limiting 116
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop trend
The Loop Trend shows a graphical and textual overview of a selected loop.
LOOPTAG1 TUNE MAY06

11:30
AUTO RSP ENGU
2500.0
07:35 07:55 08:15
1500.0
PV 2205.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 DEV 205.0
Figure 42 Single loop trend

Table 57 Details of single loop trend
Feature Description
Loop mode See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press
Auto/Manual.
Loop Tag Press Detail to move cursor to this, then press Enter to display the Loop Tune
Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 111). You can switch between
these two displays; the trend line will be buffered.
Setpoint value of the loop.
PV bar graph on right Current value of PV

side
PV value at lower left Current value of PV
PV trend Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed by switching to Loop
Tune Constants display. See Loop tune constants (page 111).
OUT Loop output. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and Decrement
to change value. Loop must be in MAN.
SP Setpoint value. To change, press Detail to move cursor. Press Increment and
Decrement to change value.
DEV PVs deviation from setpoint.
TUNE When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop Autotune (page
110).
TIP
This display is not selectable from the Loop Menu for ON/OFF or A/M BIAS loop type.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop Autotune
This display lets you set up and start the loop tuning function. When initiated, the controller will start
controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants, and begins PID
control with the correct tuning parameters.
Table 58 Details of loop auto tune (not listed in order of appearance)
Feature Description
Loop mode See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes, press Auto/Manual.
STATUS Inactive, Tuning (is in progress)
PV Value of Process Variable
OUTPUT Output of loop
OVERRIDE Appears when high output limit override is active.

ON
SETPOINT Value of setpoint
ACTIVE Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).

TUNE SET
FUZZY Select ON to activate Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression to minimize overshoot after a setpoint
change or a process disturbance.
Select OFF to disable Fuzzy Logic.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint
and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an
overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID
tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or Disabled as required by the
application to work with TUNE On-Demand tuning.
ACCUTUNE Select Enable to display the tuning menu items below. Select Disable to hide them from view.
(SWITCH) TSET1 uses Gain #1, Rate #1, Reset #1.

TUNE SET
TSET2 uses Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2.
START TUNE Select this to begin the autotuning process.
TIP
This display is not selectable from the Loop Menu for ON/OFF or A/M BIAS loop type.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop tune constants

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.
Table 59 Details of loop tune constants
Feature Description
ACTIVE TUNE SET Tune set being used by the controller (TSET1 or TSET2).
SWITCH TUNE SET Lets you select the active tune set (TSET1 or TSET2). Determines which set
of Gain/PB, Rate, and Reset parameters are used by the loop.
GAIN #1 OR #2 * Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change
(%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band.
PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) # PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a
1 OR #2 * proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.
RATE #1 OR #2 Rate affects the controllers output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.
RESET #1 OR #2 Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controllers output according to the size of
the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times
proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many
minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).
FEEDFORWARD GAIN** Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).
MANUAL RESET** Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of
output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.
SET TIMEBASE Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 15, 30 minutes (default), 1,
2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 109) for details.
*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer.
**Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS Step, or CARBON.
TIP
You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend (page 109). Pressing Escape will
return you to the Loop Trend, preserving the buffered trend data.
If you access this screen from the Loop menu, the Loop Trends buffered data is not
preserved.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop control setup

The Loop Control Setup Display shows parameters of the selected loop.
Table 60 Details of loop control setup
Feature Description
Loop mode See Table 54 for details. To change between AUTO and MAN modes,
press Auto/Manual.
TYPE PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M BIAS
DIRECT/REVERSE Shows control action.
DIRECT: PID action causes output to increase as PV increases.

REVERSE: PID action causes output to decrease as PV increases.
PV Value of process variable.
OUTPUT Loops output in %.
OVERRIDE ON Appears when high output limit override is active.
LOCAL SP* Value of Local Setpoint.
REMOTE SP* Value of Remote Setpoint. This value is changeable only if it is

configured as a second Local Setpoint (LSP2). It is read-only if it is
connected to a function block within the configuration.
SWITCH SP* Select this to switch between LSP and RSP.
FAILSAFE Loops output during a failure. -5% to +105%.
RATIO GAIN ** Gain value for a ratio loop. -20 to +20.
RATIO BIAS ** Local bias value in engineering units. -99999 to +99999. Enterable only if
it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured for remote
bias.
MOTOR DEADBAND % *** Value of adjustable deadband in %.
MOTOR TRAVERSE TIME (SEC) *** Motor travel time in seconds.
HYSTERESIS**** Loop alarms hysteresis. 0 to 10% of PV range.

* Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias.
** Visible only if Loop Type is PID, 3POS, or CARBON and Bias/Gain is configured.
*** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS.
**** Visible only if Loop Type is ON/OFF.
TIP
Entry of Local Setpoint will be ignored by the controller if tracking is on and if the loop is in
Manual mode.
Ratio Bias is enterable only if it is configured for local bias. It is read-only if it is configured
for remote bias.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Carbon parameters
This display lets you adjust various carbon loop factors.
Table 61 Details of carbon loop
Feature Description
press Auto/Manual.
FURNACE FACTOR Lets you adjust the % Carbon as measured by the controller to agree with
the results of actual shim stock tests. This adjustment may be needed to
correct for specific furnace characteristics such as atmosphere
differences, probe location, and furnace leaks.
ANTI-SOOTING Lets you adjust the anti-sooting factor, which limits the %C working
setpoint of the downstream control block to a value which will not permit
sooting to occur in the furnace. When anti-sooting is ON, then the anti-
sooting factor is calculated as a linear translation of probe temperature to
%C clamped at 0.75% and 2.0%. When anti-sooting is OFF, then the
factor is fixed at 2.0% for all temperatures.
% HYDROGEN Lets you adjust % HYDROGEN, one of the factors in the dewpoint
calculation. The dewpoint calculation is a function of the mV input (IN)
from the oxygen probe, temperature of the probe, and %H. The equations
used are probe-type dependent and are supplied by the manufacturer.
% CO Lets you adjust % Carbon measurement to compensate for variations in

the amount of CO in the carrier gas. This value is changeable only if it is
configured as a number. It is read-only if it is connected to a function block
within the configuration.
TIP
Carbon Parameters are visible only for Carbon loop types.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop alarm setpoints

This display shows the loops setpoints and alarm types. A loop can have two alarms; and each loop alarm
can have two setpoints and types.
Table 62 Details of loop alarm setpoints
Feature Description
press Auto/Manual.
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 The value at which the alarm will activate.
ALARM 1 TYPE 1 No Alarm
PV High - Alarm when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint
PV Low - Alarm when PV is less than the alarm setpoint
Dev High - Alarm when PV - SP is greater than the alarm setpoint.
Dev Low - Alarm when SP - PV is greater than the alarm setpoint.
SP High - Alarm when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint
SP Low - Alarm when SP is less than the alarm setpoint
Out High - Alarm when output is greater than the alarm setpoint
Out Low - Alarm when output is less than the alarm setpoint
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1
ALARM 1 TYPE 2 same as Alarm 1 Type 1
ALARM HYSTERESIS Affects the point at which an alarm clears. For Out High and Out Low
alarms, hysteresis is % of the loops output span. For all other alarm
types, it is % of PV span.
PV High - Alarm clears when PV is less than the alarm setpoint by the
amount of hysteresis.
PV Low - Alarm clears when PV is greater than the alarm setpoint by the
SP High - Alarm clears when SP is less than the alarm setpoint by the
SP Low - Alarm clears when SP is greater than the alarm setpoint by the
Out High - Alarm clears when output is less than the alarm setpoint by
the amount of hysteresis.
Out Low - Alarm clears when output is greater than the alarm setpoint
by the amount of hysteresis.
Dev High - Alarm clears when PV - SP is less than the alarm setpoint by
Dev Low - Alarm clears when SP - PV is less than the alarm setpoint by
TIP
These Loop Alarm parameters are used to set the conditions under which loop alarms occur;
they do not generate the alarm. To generate the alarm, loop alarms must be configured in an
Alarm Group. If a loop alarm is not assigned to an alarm group, it will not be generated. See
Alarms section.
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
Loop limits
This display shows all limits related to the selected loop.
Table 63 Details of loop limits
Feature Description
press Auto/Manual.
SP HIGH LIM* Highest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.
SP LOW LIM* Lowest allowable setpoint value. -99999 to +99999.
SP RATE UP LIM* Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a higher value. 0
to 9999 units/minute.
SP RATE DOWN LIM* Highest allowable rate at which a setpoint changes to a lower value. 0 to
9999 units/minute.
PV HIGH LIM Highest allowable PV value. 99999 to +99999
PV LOW LIM Lowest allowable PV value. 99999 to +99999
OUT HIGH LIM** Highest allowable loop output value. 5 to +105%
OUT LOW LIM** Lowest allowable loop output value. 5 to +105%
AUTOTUNE OUT HIGH LIM*** Highest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the
process.
AUTOTUNE OUT LOW LIM*** Lowest value of the output beyond which the motor no longer affects the
process.
* Visible for all Loop Types except A/M Bias.

** Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON
*** Visible only if Loop Type is 3POS
9/03
Loops
Loop Setup
High Output Limiting

On PID loops this feature prevents potentially damaging the product or the process by exposing material to
excessive thermal shock caused by applying the maximum PID output during initial startup or product
changeover. High output limiting is enabled by the Track digital input, and when active, limits the PID
output to a value present on the Track analog input for a user specified time period. After the time period
expires, the output limit ramps up at a user specified rate to the normal (non-override) high PID output
limit. The operator interface will indicate an OVERRIDE status at the bottom of the loop displays when
the High Output Limit is active.
The Output limiting feature is also available for Carbon Potential loops but the output limiting action is
only active after the process temperature limit has exceeded the user specified Low Temperature Limit,
which forces the output to 0% or 50% for duplex outputs.
Table 64 Details of high output limiting
Feature Description
TYPE Loop type is PID or CARBON
DIRECT or REVERSE Shows control action.

HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE YES: Changes the operation of track command and track value to output
ENABLE limit enable and output limit value.
NO: Normal output high limit is used.
HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT OVERRIDE ON: Digital input controlling output limiting is ON.
STATUS
OFF: Digital input controlling output limiting is OFF.
CURRENT HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT % Current output high limit. When in override status, this changes
according to loops tracking value and ramp rate. It will never exceed the
loops normal (non-override) high output limit.
TIME IN OVERRIDE Elapsed time that High Output Limit Override Status is ON and High
Output Limit Override Enable is YES. It will continue counting even after
the loops normal output high limit is reached. It resets to zero when the
Override Status changes to NO (i.e., when loops discrete Output Track
Command turns off).
DELAY TIME (MINS) Enter number of minutes. When override status is ON, the delay time
elapses before the override output limit begins to ramp up at the
specified rate. Delay time of zero causes the override high output limit to
track the loops tracking value until override status is OFF.
RAMP RATE (%/MIN) Enter %/minute rate at which the output limit will (after delay time) ramp
up to the normal non-override high limit. Rate of zero causes override
limit to track the loops tracking value during the delay time, after which
high output limit steps without ramping to the normal output high limit.
9/03
Loops
Loop Operation Displays

Overview
1
Loop operation displays are accessed by the Display Group keys through 5 [ 8 ]. A variety of
loop operation displays are available for your use to fit your application. Selection of display formats is
performed using the Hybrid Control Designer. All available displays are described in this section.
The following loop operation displays are available:
Loop Operation Display See page
Loop Summary 118
Loop Control 119
Multiloop Faceplate 120
1 Loop Numeric 121
Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen 122
Loop Tune Constants display 123
A/M bias 124
Loop modes (all loop displays)

All loop displays indicate the current operating mode of the selected loop. Loop modes are described in
Table 65.
Table 65 Loop modes
Loop mode Meaning

AUTO RSP Loop is controlling the process and Remote Setpoint is selected.
MAN RSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Remote Setpoint is selected.
IMAN RSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary
Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary
Cascades PV. Remote Setpoint is selected.
LO RSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value. Remote
Setpoint is selected.
AUTO LSP Loop is controlling the process and Local Setpoint is selected.
MAN LSP Loop output can only be changed manually. Local Setpoint is selected.
IMAN LSP IMAN (Initialization Manual) occurs with Cascade loops only (Figure 41). Secondary
Cascade is in MAN or LSP, therefore Primary Cascade output is tracking Secondary
Cascades PV. Local Setpoint is selected.
LO LSP LO (Local Override): loop output is tracking the loops Output Tracking value. Local
Setpoint is selected or High Limit Override is ON.
9/03
Loops
TIP
In the Hybrid Control Designer, loops can be configured to display a specific number of decimal
places for their values. A higher number of decimal places allows more precision; conversely, it
limits whole numbers to the number of digits remaining to the left of the decimal point. In cases
where the desired whole number is larger than can fit in the available digits, the decimal point
will be moved to accommodate the new whole number. In other words, the need to enter a
larger whole number takes precedence over the need for extra decimal places.
A maximum of 7 digits can be displayed, including whole numbers and decimal places.
Example
Loops Set Point High Limit = 5000
Decimal places = 4 (therefore, 7 4 = 3 digits available for whole numbers)
On a loop operation display, operator wants to enter a setpoint value of 2000, a 4-digit whole
number. This is one more digit than allowed by the decimal place setting. Result: The decimal
place setting of 4 is ignored to allow the value of 2000 to be entered.
See also
While performing loop operations, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message descriptions.
Loop summary
The Loop Summary lists a text-only overview of up to:
Model 1042 - 16 control loops
Model 559 - 8 control loops.
Table 66 Details of loop summary
Feature Description
Mode See Table 65. To change loop mode between AUTO and MAN, press
Auto/Manual.
Number of loops Up to 16 loops
LOOP TAG Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to the desired loop tag and press
Enter to go to the Loop Control Display of that loop (page 119).
PV Value of process variable
SP Value of setpoint. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value.
OUT Value of output. Press Detail to move to this and adjust the value. Loop
must be in MAN first.
9/03
Loops
Loop control
This display is accessible from all loop operating displays.
Table 67 Loop control details
Feature Description
Auto/Manual.
TUNE When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop
Autotune (page110).
TYPE Choices: PID, ON/OFF, CARBON, 3 POS, A/M/BIAS
DIRECT/REVERSE Shows control action.

OVERRIDE ON Appears when high output limit override is active.
OUTPUT Value of output
LOCAL SP Value of Local Setpoint
REMOTE SP Value of Remote Setpoint
SWITCH SP Select this to switch loop setpoint between Remote and Local.
RATIO GAIN* Value of Ratio Gain.
*Appears for ratio loops only.
9/03
Loops
Multiloop faceplate
The Multi-loop Faceplate displays provide loop operation information in an easy-to-read loop faceplate
format. These displays are available in a 2-loop, 3-loop, 4-loop, and 8-loop format (see Note 1). Select any
loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on that loop (page 119). Press Tab and Detail to move
cursor around the display.
Note 1. The 8-loop faceplate display is only available on Model 1042. To display 8 loops of information on
Model 559, use the 8-loop Summary display. See Page 118.
LOOPTAG1 LOOPTAG2 LOOPTAG3 LOOPTAG4

2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 2500.0
1500.0 1500.0 1500.0 1500.0

PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5
AUTO RSP AUTO RSP AUTO RSP AUTO RSP
LOOPTAG5 LOOPTAG6 LOOPTAG7 LOOPTAG8
2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 2500.0
1500.0 1500.0 1500.0 1500.0

PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0 PV 2205.0
SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5 OUT 83.5
AUTO RSP AUTO RSP AUTO RSP AUTO RSP
Figure 43 Multiloop faceplate (Example of 8 Loop faceplate for Model 1042 only)
Table 68 Multiloop faceplate details
Feature Description
Auto/Manual.
Loop Tag Name of the loop.

Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Enter" to go to the Loop Control
Display (page 119).
Tab to the desired loop tag and press "Detail" to move cursor to the SP
and OUT fields.
Press "Tab" again to move cursor to next loop tag.
Vertical Bar Graphically shows value of Process Variable within its range.
2500 High scale value of the PV.
1500 Low scale value of the PV.
Arrow Graphically shows value of Setpoint
SP Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.
OUT Value of Output. You can change this only if loop is in MAN.
9/03
Loops
1 loop numeric
This display shows the selected loop. Select the loop tag to go to the Loop Control display for details on the
loop (page 119). Press Detail to go to the SP and OUT values.
2500.0 LOOPTAG1
AUTO LSP TUNE
AL1 AL2
PV
2205.0 ENGU
SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 %
1500.0
Figure 44 Single loop numeric

Table 69 Single loop numeric details
Feature Description
Loop Tag Name of the loop. Tab to the loop tag and press Enter to go to the Loop
Control Display (page 119). Press the "TAB" key to move cursor to the SP
and OUT fields.
Auto/Manual.
LSP / RSP Local Setpoint or Remote Setpoint indicator
TUNE When this is visible, Loop is being tuned automatically. See Loop
Autotune (page 110).
AL1 AL2 Loop alarm indicators. See Loop alarm setpoints (page 114) for alarm
setpoints setup.
SP Value of Setpoint. You can change this value.
OUT Value of Output. You can change this value only if loop is in MAN.
9/03
Loops
Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

This operate display shows the selected loop in a single loop faceplate format with a loop trend screen. For
details, press ENTER at this display to call up the Loop Control display (page 119). From there the first
menu item calls up the Loop Tune Constants display (page 123).
LOOPTAG1
11:30
AUTO RSP
100.0
07:35 07:55 08:15
0.0
PV 2205.0 SP 2000.0
OUT 83.5 DEV 205.0
Figure 45 Single loop faceplate with loop trend screen

Table 70 Details of single loop faceplate with loop trend screen
Feature Description
Loop mode See Table 54 for details
Loop Tag Indicates tag number assigned to loop. Press "ENTER" from this display to select
"Loop Control" display (page 119).
Setpoint of the loop.
PV bar graph on right Current value of PV

side
PV value at lower left Current value of PV
PV trend Shows PV over the last timebase. Timebase can be changed in the Loop Tune
Constants operate display.
OUT Value of loop output. Can be changed when loop is in MAN mode.
SP Setpoint value. To change, see the Loop Control operate display.
DEV PVs deviation from setpoint.
TIP
This display is not available for ON/OFF control type.
9/03
Loops
Loop Tune Constants display

This display shows the tuning constants for the selected loop.
Table 71 Details of loop tune constants display
Feature Description
GAIN #1 OR #2 * Gain is the ratio of the output change (%) over the measured variable change
(%) that caused it. Gain = 100/Proportional Band
PROPORTIONAL BAND (PB) # PB is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a
1 OR #2 * proportional controller will produce a 100% change in its output.
RATE #1 OR #2 Rate affects the controllers output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing faster.
RESET #1 OR #2 Reset, or integral time, adjusts the controllers output according to the size of
the deviation (SP - PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain. Reset is measured as how many times
proportional action is repeated per minute (repeats/minute) or how many
minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs (minutes/repeat).
FEEDFORWARD GAIN** Applies Gain to the feedforward variable (FFV).
MANUAL RESET** Manual Reset is only applicable if you do not use Reset. It allows correction of
output to account for load changes to bring the PV up to setpoint.
SET TIMEBASE Determines the time axis of the loop trend display: 5 minutes, 15, 30 minutes,
1, 2, 4, 24, or 8 hours. See Loop trend (page 109) in Loops Setup for details.
*Either Gain or PB is visible but not both. Visibility is selectable with the Hybrid Control Designer.
**Visible only if Loop Type is PID or CARBON.
TIP
You can also access this screen from the Loop Trend in "Loops Setup"(page 109). Pressing
Escape will return you to the "Loop Control" screen, preserving the buffered trend data.
9/03
Loops
A/M bias
This display lets you assign a bias to the loop PV. That is, OUT = PV + BIAS while loop is in AUTO.
AUTO/MANUAL BIAS
LOOPTAG1 AUTO
100.0 100.0
AL1 AL2
OUT
60.1 %
PV
80.3 %
BIAS
-11.2
0.0 0.0
Figure 46 A/M bias
Table 72 A/M bias details
Feature Description
Auto/Manual.
AL1 & AL2 Loop alarm indicators visible while the loop alarm conditions are active.
Loop Tag Name of the loop. Press Tab to move to OUT.
OUT 0-100 %. To adjust the output (and therefore the bias), select MAN mode,
then adjust with Increment or Decrement.
Bias (OUT PV) is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to

AUTO.
PV Value of Process Variable. 0-100 %
BIAS Bias = OUT PV. Range: 100 % to +100 %.
Bias is calculated at the moment of transition from MAN to AUTO.
Left vertical bar Output
Right vertical bar PV
9/03
Summary Displays
Analog Input Summary

Access
Main menu, Summary Displays.
Description
Shows address and status of all configured analog inputs.
Table 73 Analog Input Summary details
Feature Description
ADDRESS Physical location of the analog input (rack, module, channel).
R M C
TAG Identifies the point. Default is AI.
DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is AI.
VALUE Current value
ERROR STATUS Blank: Normal operation
T/C WARNING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured
Note: On Model 559 resistance is higher than normal.
the error status, if
present, will be T/C FAILING: When burnout check occurs on the T/C, the measured resistance
displayed in Yellow indicates that the T/Cs resistance is to a point where the burnout failure will
directly below the result.
physical address BURNOUT FAIL: The sensor (T/C or RTD) is failing burnout checks.
(R M C ) of the CJ WARNING: One of the cold-junction sensors is failing.
channel. This area CJ FAILURE: Two conditions can create this failure.
will be blank if the Both cold-junction sensors are failing.
channel is operating
The difference between the values measured by the two CJs is greater than
properly.
10 degrees C.
CJ HIGH TEMP: One of the CJs is indicating a high temperature reading.
UNDER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% below the
programmed range of the sensor.
OVER RANGE: The signal at the terminals is more than 10% over the
programmed range of the sensor.
CONVERT FAIL: When attempting to take a reading, the analog-to-digital
converter (ADC) fails. This can occur if the incoming signal is either too large or
small. It also could result if the ADC circuit is failing.
FORCED: The point has been manually forced to its present value, probably via
a PC host.
NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel. Possible reasons are:
module not installed
wrong module installed
expansion rack missing
SPI backplane is failing
9/03
Summary Displays
Analog Output Summary
Analog Output Summary

Access
Description
Shows status and address of all configured analog outputs.
Table 74 Analog Output Summary details
Feature Description
ADDRESS Physical location of the analog output (rack, module, channel).
R M C
TAG Identifies the point. Default is AO.
DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is AO.
VALUE Current value
ERROR STATUS Blank: Normal operation
Note: On Model 559 CLAMP LOW: The AO function blocks input is less than the configured low
the error status, if range value.
present, will be
displayed in Yellow CLAMP HIGH: The AO function blocks input is greater than the configured high
directly below the range value.
physical address
BAD CHANNEL: There is no physical output device connected to this channel,
(R M C ) of the
or the output device is showing an open connection.
channel. This area
will be blank if the NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
channel is operating channel. Possible reasons are:
properly.
module not installed
expansion rack missing
Digital Input Summary

Access
Description
Shows status and address of all configured digital inputs.
Table 75 Digital Input Summary details
9/03
Summary Displays
Digital Output Summary
Feature Description
ADDRESS Physical location of the digital input (rack, module, channel).
R M C
TAG Identifies the point. Default is DI.
DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is DI.
STATE Current state
ERROR STATUS Blank: Normal operation.

Note: On Model 559 FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC
the error status, if host.
present, will be
displayed in Yellow NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
directly below the channel. Possible reasons are:
physical address
(R M C ) of the module not installed
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating expansion rack missing
properly.
Digital Output Summary

Access
Description
Shows status and address of all configured digital outputs.
Table 76 Digital Output Summary details
Feature Description
ADDRESS Physical location of the digital output (rack, module, channel).
R M C
TYPE DO: Digital Output
TPO: Time Proportional Output
3P-F: 3 Position Step-Forward
3P-R: 3 Position Step-Reverse
TAG Identifies the point. Default is DO.
DESCRIPTION Identifies the point. Default is DO.
9/03
Summary Displays
Variable Summary
Feature Description
STATE Current state
ERROR STATUS Blank: Normal operation.

Note: On Model 559 FORCED: The point has been forced to its present value, probably via a PC
the error status, if host.
present, will be
displayed in Yellow NO COMM: The main controller CPU is unable to communicate with the
directly below the channel. Possible reasons are:
physical address
(R M C ) of the module not installed
channel. This area
will be blank if the
channel is operating expansion rack missing
properly.
Variable Summary
Access
Description
A variable is a digital or analog tagged element of a control configuration which allows operator input to
connected function blocks. The Variable display lets you view the values or discrete statuses of variables
that affect your process.
Table 77 Variable summary details
Feature Description
TAG NAME n Name of variable.
DESCRIPTOR Optional description of the variable. If descriptor is not used, TAGNAME is

repeated
Value or state The setting for an analog point can be any appropriate value from 99999 to
99999, and a digital point can be set in its ON or OFF state.
Engineering Units The engineering units associated with the variable.
See also
To edit a variable, use the Overview screen. See Overview (page 262).
9/03
Summary Displays
Variable Summary
9/03
Alarms
Overview
Access
Alarm displays are accessed through the main menu (Alarms/Events/Diagnostics) or Alarm key.
Alarms defined
There are two senses of the word alarm.
In the first sense, an alarm is a tagged discrete point that warrants operator attention. Also known as an
alarm point. Any tagged discrete point in the controller configuration can be designated as an alarm point.
The person who creates the controller configuration and the alarm displays determines which discrete
points will be alarm points.
In the second sense, an alarm occurs when an alarm point is in its alarm state and is indicated on an alarm
display.
Alarm indication
Alarms are indicated using a 4-level hierarchy.
Red alarm indicator at the bottom of the display. This indicator appears on all displays and alerts the
operator to the presence of an alarm in the system. The red indicator flashes when any alarm exists that
has not been acknowledged; the indicator is solid (not flashing) when all alarms have been
acknowledged but their conditions still exist.
Alarm Summary display. Provides a quick overview as to the location of alarms in the system.
Alarm Group display. This display indicates the specific alarm(s) in an alarm group.
Alarm Detail display. This display provides specific information on a single alarm.
Investigating alarms
Three methods are available to access the Alarm displays. The first two methods are standard, the third
method is configurable.
1. Press Alarm from any display (except alarm group) to see the Alarm Summary. Select the desired group
and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.
2. Press Menu to access the Main Menu, then select Alarms/Events/Diagnostics. Select Alarm Summary.
Select the desired group and press Enter to see the Alarm Group.
3. Configure the Display Group keys to contain Alarm Group displays as appropriate for your application.
Press the Display Group key and use Page Up and Page Down to see the Alarm Groups.
9/03
Alarms
Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary
The Alarm Summary gives you the composite status of each alarm group.
Access
Main menu, Alarms/Events/Diagnostics, or
Alarm key
Description
Table 78 Details of alarm summary
Feature Description
ALARM GROUP n Lists all alarm groups. Each group has up to 12 alarms.
Alarm Group Status UNACKED: At least one point in the alarm group is in alarm and has not
been acknowledged by the operator. Press Enter to see all points in the
group.
ACKED: No points in the alarm group are unacknowledged. At least one

point in the alarm group is in alarm and has been acknowledged by the
operator. Press Enter to see all points in the group.
CLEARED: At least one point in the alarm group was in alarm then out of
alarm and was not manually acknowledged. Occurs if at least one point is
configured as manual acknowledge. If all alarms in the group are auto
acknowledge type, cleared status can not occur.
NONE: No points in the alarm group are in alarm.
NOTE: The Alarm Summary Display for Model 559 consists of two pages. This first page shows the status
for Alarm Groups 1 through 10; the second page shows the status for Alarm Groups 11 through 20. Use
the page Up and Down keys to go between these two displays.
9/03
Alarms
Alarm Group
Alarm Group
This display shows the status of each discrete point in the selected alarm group.
Access
From Alarm Summary or from a Display Group key, if so configured.
Description
ALARM GROUP 1 MAY06

11:30
TAG-0001 TAG-0002 TAG-0003

STATE1 STATE2 STATE1 C
TAG-0004 TAG-0005 TAG-0006
STATE1 STATE2 STATE1
TAG-0007 TAG-0008 TAG-0009

TAG-0010 TAG-0011 TAG-0012

STATE2 C STATE2 STATE1
Figure 47 Alarm group display

For each alarm point the following is displayed.
Tag name
Current state of the point (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.)
Alarm state. Possible states are
Flashing LED in alarm and unacknowledged. Applies to manual acknowledge and auto
acknowledge alarms.
Solid LED in alarm and was acknowledged manually while in alarm. Applies to manual
acknowlege and auto acknowledge alarms.
C Cleared. The point went in alarm then out of alarm and was not acknowledged. Applies to
manual acknowledge alarms, not auto acknowledge alarms.
Blank Not in alarm
Acknowledging alarms
To acknowledge all alarms in the group, press Alarm. If an alarmed point appears in multiple alarm groups,
you must acknowledge each group containing that point.
Manual vs. auto acknowledge

Alarm points are configured as either manual acknowledge or auto acknowledge.
When a manual acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out of alarm without being acknowleged by
the operator, it will be indicated as cleared. When an auto acknowledge alarm goes into alarm and then out
of alarm without being acknowledged by the operator, it will show no indication it was in alarm.
9/03
Alarms
Alarm Detail
Alarm Detail
This display shows the following details about the selected alarm point in a group:
Tag name and description
Last time the selected point was in alarm
Last time the selected point went out of alarm
Number of occurrences
Two lines of help text
If the selected point has not been in alarm since the Controller was reset, the following message is
displayed: NO ALARM SINCE LAST RESET.
Access
The Alarm Detail display is accessed from the Alarm Group display. See Page 133 for information about
the Alarm Group display.
With Alarm Group displayed, press Tab and Detail keys to move the cursor to the desired alarm tag. Press
Enter to show that alarms details. Press Escape to return to the Alarm Group display.
ALARM DETAIL MAY06

TAG-0001 TAG_DESCRIPTOR 11:30
LAST TIME IN ALARM MAY 05 01 12:00:00

LAST TIME OUT ALARM MAY 06 01 08:00:00
NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES 3
1ST LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT

2ND LINE OF 24-CHAR TEXT
TIP
This display does not update periodically, that is, changes to the alarm status while you are
looking at this display are not shown.
9/03
Events
Event Summary
Access
Main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics to Event Summary.
Description
An event is a digital point whose transition warrants operator attention. The Event Summary shows the last
150 events.
ATTENTION
The most recent event is also shown in the event stripe at the bottom of the display. Press
Enter to clear the event stripe.
EVENT SUMMARY MAY06

11:30
PAGE 1 OF 10
MAY 06 11:15 TAG-9999 STAGE 2 IN PROG STARTD
MAY 06 11:14 TAG-9998 TAG DESCRIPTOR STATE1
CLEAR EVENT STRIPE
ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT EVENT STRIPE S HZ RUN
Figure 48 Event summary
9/03
Diagnostics
Overview
Access
All diagnostics are accessed through main menu Alarms/Events/Diagnostics.
Communications diagnostics are also accessible through main menu Unit Setup - See Page 153, select
"Communications".
Diagnostic types
The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start-up and during on-line operation.
Diagnostics are accessed in the following hierarchy.
Controller Diagnostics show the status of the controllers components (Rack 1) and any expansion Racks
2-5 (page 137).
System (Rack 1only) (page 137) - Read Only
CPU (page 137) - Read Only
Memory (page 138) - Read Only
Real Time Clock (Rack 1 only) (page 138) - Read Only
I/O (page 139) - Press "Enter" for I/O Module Diagnostics. See Page
Communications error messages (Rack 1only) (page 140)
I/O Module Diagnostics show status of all I/O modules (page 141)
Panel Diagnostics shows list of most recent diagnostics (page 148)
Communications Diagnostics (page 149 )
RS-232 Configuration Port (page 150)
RS-485 OI Port (page 150)
Network Port (page 151)
- Network Host Connections
- Network Peer Connections
Expansion I/O Ports (page 152)
9/03
Diagnostics
Controller diagnostics
This display shows different classes of diagnostics and their statuses. Select Page Up and Page Down to
see each rack. Any rack not configured will be so indicated. Select I/O or COMM PORTS to see details.
CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5 RACK 1 PAGE 2 OF 5 RACK 2
SYSTEM GOOD CPU GOOD

CPU WATCHDOG ERROR MEMORY GOOD
MEMORY GOOD I/O MODULE ERROR
RTC GOOD
I/O GOOD
COMM PORTS
ALARM D MESSAG E TEXT S HZ RUN ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S HZ RUN
Figure 49 Controller diagnostics
Table 79 Details of controller diagnostics error status messages
Class Status Possible Cause Controller Action Fix

SYSTEM GOOD N/A N/A N/A
SYSTEM FORCED OUTPUT A block has an output None Remove force on block output..
that is forced.
SYSTEM INVALID CONFIG. A configuration that An empty database is Download a valid configuration.
exceeds the loop created.
capacity of the
controller was
downloaded or an
invalid configuration
exists.
SYSTEM SWITCH FAULT A failure is detected in 1. All control blocks stop Replace CPU.
the switch reading. running
2. All I/O scanning ceases.
This forces the modules
into failsafe.
SYSTEM NO MASTER The controller The controller is not Select Modbus Master protocol for
PORT configuration contains scanning the Modbus either the RS-232 or RS-485 port.
at least on Modbus slave devices.
slave block, but
neither the RS-232
nor the RS-485 port is
set up as a Modbus
Master port.
CPU GOOD N/A N/A N/A
9/03
Diagnostics

CPU WATCHDOG Watchdog reset 1. Associated rack monitor 1. Force a cold start.
ERROR resulting from blocks RACK OK pin is 2. Upgrade controller module software.
software failure turned off. 3. Replace CPU board.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR 4. Contact Honeywell Personnel.
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
CPU PREFETCH CPU failed when 1. Controller performs a 1. Force a cold start.
ERROR attempting to fetch an restart 2. Isolate system from noise and force
instruction from the 2. Associated rack monitor a cold start.
prefetch register. blocks RACK OK pin is 3. Replace CPU board.
turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
CPU ADDRESS ERROR The reserved See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.
exception occurred for
an unknown reason.
CPU UNDEFINED Bad Instruction See PREFETCH ERROR See PREFETCH ERROR.
INSTR ERROR Detected
CPU DATA ABORT CPU failed when See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.
ERROR attempting to access
data.
CPU S/W INTERRUPT Software Interrupt See PREFETCH ERROR. See PREFETCH ERROR.
ERR occurred which is not
supported by the
software.
CPU VECTOR ERROR Corrupted interrupt Interrupt vectors were See WATCHDOG ERROR.
vectors in RAM. restored.
MEMORY GOOD N/A N/A N/A
MEMORY 5 DAY BATTERY Estimated battery life 1. Associated rack monitor Replace battery.
WARNING is less than 5 days. blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
MEMORY LOW BATTERY Battery voltage is low. 1. Associated rack monitor Replace battery.
blocks RACK OK pin is
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks LOW BATTERY
pin is turned on.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
MEMORY FLASH ERROR Flash failed to burn 1. Associated rack monitor 1. Force a cold start.
blocks RACK OK pin is 2. Replace CPU board.
turned off.
2. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
RTC GOOD N/A N/A N/A
9/03
Diagnostics

RTC NOT RTC not programmed 1. Time and date is set to Program RTC.
PROGRAMMED 00:00:00, January 1, 1970.
2. Associated rack monitor
turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
RTC BAD DATA Bad date and time See NOT 1. Program RTC.
PROGRAMMED. 2. Cycle power.
3. Replace CPU.
4. Replace boards in rack.
5. Replace rack.
RTC PROGRAMMING RTC failed to program See NOT See BAD DATA.
FAILURE PROGRAMMED.
RTC READ FAILURE Unable to read RTC See NOT See BAD DATA.
PROGRAMMED.
I/O GOOD N/A N/A N/A
I/O MODULE ERROR One of the module Select I/O from the menu Select I/O from the menu to see details
diagnostics in the to see details on the faulty on the faulty module. See I/O module
associated rack is set module. See I/O module diagnostics on page 141.
to MISMATCH, BAD diagnostics on page 141.
MODULE, BAD
CHANNEL., or
MISSING/NO COMM
(if the
communications is
failing due to the
module not
installedcould occur
if the module is
installed but CPU
cant communicate to
it).
I/O MODULE HI CJ One of the module Select I/O from the menu Select I/O from the menu to see details
TEMP diagnostics in the to see details on the faulty on the faulty module. See I/O module
associated rack is set module. See I/O module diagnostics on page 141.
to HI CJ diagnostics on page 141.
TEMPERATURE.
I/O FAILURE The Controller All associated module 1. Remove modules and check for bent
module is unable to diagnostics are set to pins on connectors.
successfully MISSING/NO COMM. 2. Reinsert modules one at a time and
communicate to any note which module the diagnostic
modules that are in its See MISSING/NO COMM reoccurs, and replace that module.
SPI backplane. in Table 81 I/O Module 3. Cycle power to the rack.
Error Statuses on page 4. Replace the power supply.
143 for further details. 5. Replace the rack.
6. Replace the CPU board.
9/03
Diagnostics

I/O NO COMM The Main CPU is See FAILURE. 1. Verify that the expansion rack should
unable to successfully be in the configuration
communicate to an 2. Verify that the jumpers on the
expansion rack that is scanner are setup for the correct rack
in its configuration. address.
3. Check that expansion rack is on.
4. Check the expansion racks status
LED for diagnostic information.
5. Check that cable is connected to
expansion rack.
6. If a hub is used, check that all cables
are properly connected to the hub,
proper crossover cables are used, and
that hub is powered.
7. Cycle power to the rack.
8. Cycle power to the hub.
9. Replace the expansion racks power
supply.
10. Replace the expansion rack.
11. Replace the expansion racks
scanner board.
12. Replace the main CPU.
I/O BAD VERSION The Main CPU All associated module 1. Upgrade the scanner software either
determined that its diagnostics are set to by replacing the module or doing a
software is not MISSING/NO COMM. code-download.
compatible with the Refer to MISSING/NO 2. Update Main CPU software either by
scanner module. COMM diagnostic for replacing the module or doing a code
further details. download.
COMM GOOD N/A N/A N/A
COMM WARNING One of the comm Refer to Communication Refer to Communication Ports
ports is reporting an Ports diagnostics on diagnostics on page 149.
application error page 149.
COMM FAILED One of the Comm Refer to Communication Refer to Communication Ports
ports is reporting a Ports diagnostics on diagnostics on page 149.
physical or data link page 149.
failure
9/03
Diagnostics
I/O module diagnostics

Access
Main menu, Alarm/Event/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, I/O
Main menu, Alarm/Event/Diagnostics, I/O Module Diagnostics
Description
This display gives the type and status of each controller racks I/O modules. Select Page Up and Page
Down to see each rack and its modules.
I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5 RACK 1
STATUS MODULE ERROR

REV LEVEL 1.00
NUMBER OF SLOTS 12
MODULE PHYSICAL TYPE CONFIGURED AS ERROR STATUS
1 AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN AI
2 AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN AI BAD CHANNEL
3 DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN DI
4 DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN DI
5 DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN DI
6 DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN DO
7 DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN AI WRONG MODULE
8 DO HIGH CURRENT RELAY DO
9 DO LOW CURRENT RELAY DO BAD MODULE
10 AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN AO
11 AO CURRENT 4-CHAN AO
12 NONE DO MISSING NO COMM
Figure 50 I/O module diagnostics - Model 1042 view
I/O MODULE DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE 1 OF 5 RACK 1
STATUS MODULE ERROR

REV LEVEL 1.00
NUMBER OF SLOTS 12
MODULE ERROR MODULE ERROR
1 AI BAD CHANNEL 7 AI HI CJ TEMP
2 AI MISMATCH 8 AI
3 DI 9 DI BAD MODULE
4 DI 10 DI
5 MISSING/COMM 11 DI MISSING/COMM
6 DO 12 DO
Figure 51 I/O module diagnostics - Model 559 view

For I/O module diagnostic details, see Table 80.
9/03
Diagnostics
Table 80 I/O module diagnostics details
Feature Description
STATUS This status is also visible on the Controller Diagnostics display I/O class. See
I/O in Table 79 (page 139) for details.
REV LEVEL Firmware revision of the rack.
NUMBER OF SLOTS Number of I/O module slots supported by the rack.
MODULE n Select to see details. See I/O Module Diagnostics physical details on page 147.
PHYSICAL TYPE * NONE

AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN
AO CURRENT 4-CHAN
AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN
DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN
DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN
DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN
DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN
FREQ PULSE INPUT 4-CHAN **
QUADRATURE INPUT 2-CHAN **
PULSE ACCUM INPUT 4-CHAN **
CONFIGURED AS* AI, AO, DI, DO
ERROR STATUS* See Table 81.
Bold items are read only
* The "Physical Type", "Configured As", and "Error Status" information is also present on the OI-559 but it
is located on a detail display. To call up the detail display, cursor to the Module number field and press the
ENTER key.
** Future
9/03
Diagnostics
I/O module error status

Table 81 I/O Module Error Statuses

ERROR HI CJ TEMP Possible causes of 1. Associated AI blocks 1. Improve ventilation to rack
STATUS this diagnostic are: that are configured as T/Cs
set their fail pin on, their 2. Replace AI module
1. One of the two CJs warn pin off, and their
on the module is output pin to the failsafe
indicating a value.
temperature reading
greater than 70 2. Associated AI blocks
degrees C. that are configured as T/Cs
set their IO status to CJ
2. Both cold-junction High Temperature for
sensors are failing to reason 1 or CJ Failure for
convert. possible causes 2 and 3.
3. The CJs are 3. Associated rack monitor
converting properly, blocks module fail pin is
but their differential is turned on.
greater than 10
degrees C. 4. Associated rack monitor
turned off.
blocks HITEMP pin is
turned on.
6. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HITEMP pin is
turned on.
7. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
ERROR MISMATCH The installed module 1. Associated blocks set 1. Verify configuration
STATUS does not agree with their fail pin on, their warn
the module required pin off, and their output pin 2. Replace module with the correct one.
for the control to the failsafe value.
strategy downloaded
in the configuration 2. Associated blocks set
file. their IO status to Channel
No Comm.

blocks module fail pin is
turned on.
turned off.
5. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
9/03
Diagnostics

ERROR MISSING/NO Main CPU is unable See MISMATCH. Action is based on the RACK STATUS
STATUS COMM to communicate to indication. If RACK STATUS is not
the module for one of MODULE ERROR, then follow the
the following reasons: prescribed action defined for the RACK
STATUS diagnostic.
1. Module is not
installed For MODULE ERROR, do the
following:
2. Backplane problem
is inhibiting the CPU 1. Verify configuration
to properly
communicate with the 2. Install module.
module
3. Module is on an
expansion rack and
the expansion rack
communications is
failing
ERROR BAD MODULE Module is reporting a See MISMATCH. User should inspect the modules
STATUS diagnostic condition. status LED to determine the nature of
See Table 82. the problem. Table 82 describes the
user action for the various LED
diagnostics.
ERROR BAD CHANNEL See Table 83 1. Associated block sets See Table 83
STATUS its fail pin on, its warn pin
off, and its output pin to
the failsafe value.
2. Associated block sets
its IO status as denoted in
Table 83.
3. Associated rack
monitor blocks module fail
pin is turned on.
4. Associated rack
monitor blocks RACK OK
pin is turned off.
5. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
9/03
Diagnostics
Bad module details

When an I/O modules error status is BAD MODULE, to indicate the type of diagnostic failure, the
modules status LED is flashed red with a number of quick strobes followed by a long off time. Table 82
outlines the potential module diagnostics.
Table 82 Bad module details

Description AI AO DI DO # of User Action
Contact AC DC Relay AC DC Strobes
FAIL SAFE The module is in the failsafe state because it is 1 1. If expansion rack, check
not receiving message requests from the communication link connection
controller module at a rate equal to the value to main CPU
configured for its failsafe timeout. 2. Remove the module and
check for a bent pin, then
reinsert the module
3. Replace the module
4. Remove other modules and
replace one at a time until the
problem reoccurs. Most likely
the last module inserted needs
to be replaced.
5. Replace the rack.
EAROM EA ROM Failed its checksum 2 None
RAM 3 Replace module
ROM 4
+24 V 5 1. Remove the module and
check for a bent pin, then
reinsert the module
2. Replace power supply
3. Replace rack
FACTORY CRC failure of primary and backup factory 6 Replace module
CAL calibration
FIELD CAL CRC failure of field calibration values 7 None, controller will switch
card to factory calibration
HARDWARE General Hardware Failure (AI=convertor not 8 Replace module
working)
HW/SW The software residing on the module does not 9 Replace module
Key match the module type. This diagnostic should
only result in the factory.
9/03
Diagnostics
Bad channel details

Below is a list of conditions that can cause a bad channel diagnostic. The associated function blocks I/O
status will indicate the nature of the diagnostic described in the failure column.
Table 83 Bad Channel details

Module Failure Description User Action
Type
AI Burnout The sensor T/C, RTD, or mV source -- is failing burnout 1. Check terminal block connections
Failure checks. 2. Replace source element
3. Replace card.
Under The signal at the terminals is less than 10% below the range of 1. Check the signal level being applied
range the sensor. to the terminals.
2. Replace card.
Over The signal at the terminals is more than 10% over the range of 1. Check the signal level being applied
range the sensor. to the terminals.
2. Replace card.
Failing to When attempting to take a reading, the ADC fails. This could 1. Check the signal level being applied
convert result if the incoming signal is either too large or small. It also to the terminals.
could result if the ADC circuit is failing. If the problem is the ADC 2. Replace card.
circuit, most likely other channels will have the same failure.
AO Channel The board indicates that the channel is failing to output the 1. Check terminal connections.
Failure correct value. 2. Replace module.
9/03
Diagnostics
I/O Module Diagnostics physical details
I/O Module Diagnostics physical details

Access
Select any module number on the I/O Module Diagnostics display to see the details.
Table 84 I/O module diagnostic details
Feature Description
TYPE NONE
AI UNIVERSAL 8-CHAN
AI LO-LEVEL 16-CHAN
AI HI-LEVEL 8-CHAN
AO CURRENT 4-CHAN
AO VOLTAGE 4-CHAN
DI DRY-CONTACT 16-CHAN
DI 120/240 VAC 16-CHAN
DI 24 VDC 16-CHAN
DO LO-CURRENT RLY 8-CHAN
DO HI-CURRENT RLY 4-CHAN
DO 120/240 VAC 8-CHAN
DO 24 VDC 16-CHAN
FREQ PULSE INPUT 4-CHAN
QUADRATURE INPUT 2-CHAN
PULSE ACCUM INPUT 4-CHAN
PART NUMBER The re-order part number of the module.
REV LEVEL Revision level of the firmware running on this module.
CONFIGURED AS AI, AO, DI, DO

(Model 559 only)
ERROR STATUS See Table 81.

(Model 559 only)
9/03
Diagnostics
Panel diagnostic log
Panel diagnostic log

The Panel Diagnostic Log is a time-ordered list of the diagnostic messages that appear on the status line (at
the bottom of the display). The log is cleared when the user selects the DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS
item.
PANEL DIAGNOSTIC LOG MAY06

11:30
MAY 05 20:51 CONTROLLER DIAG

MAY 05 20:25 ALARM/EVENT LOST
DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS
Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log
9/03
Diagnostics
Communication Ports diagnostics

Access
Main menu, Alarm/Event/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Communications
Main menu, Unit Setup, Communications - See 161
Overview
This section discusses only the diagnostics part of those displays. Refer to Communications on page 161
for other details.
COMMUNICATION PORTS
RS-232 CONFIG PORT GOOD

RS-485 OI PORT GOOD
NETWORK PORT GOOD
EXPANSION I/O PORT GOOD
MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES
Figure 53 Communication ports
At this screen each ports status is displayed. Select a port, Press Enter to see details. Refer to "Unit
Setup", "Communications" on page 161 for details on each port.
Diagnostics and Status Messages Only
RS-232 Configuration port (page 150) - Details listed on Page 162.
RS-485 OI port (page 150) - Details listed on Page 165
Network port (page 151) - Details listed on Page 166

View network host connections - Details listed on Page 167
View network peer connections - Details listed on Page 168
Network peer statistics - Details listed on Page 169
Expansion I/O port (page 152) - Details listed on Page 172
9/03
Diagnostics
RS-232 Config Port/RS-485 OI Port

The list of diagnostics for these two ports is the same.
Table 85 RS-232 Config Port/RS-485 OI Port diagnostics and statuses

PORT GOOD N/A N/A N/A
DIAGNOSTIC
PORT APPLICATION At least one response 1. Rack 1 monitor blocks At host, determine which message is
DIAGNOSTIC ERROR to a host resulted in COMPORT DIAG is set to causing the exception code and fix it.
an exception code or WARNING.
NAK. 2. Rack 1 monitor blocks
RACK OK pin is turned off.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
PORT DATA LINK A large number of 1. Rack 1 monitor blocks 1. Check baud rate.
DIAGNOSTIC ERROR message are COMPORT DIAG is set to 2. Check connectors.
resulting in data link FAILED. 3. Check cable polarity.
errors. 2. Rack 1 monitor blocks 4. Isolate cable from electrical
RACK OK pin is turned off. interference.
3. SYSTEM MONITOR 5. If RS232-to-RS485 converter used,
blocks HW OK pin is check its power, switch/jumper settings,
turned off. polarity.
PORT HARDWARE The DUART is failing Replace the controller CPU module.
DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE to operate properly.
9/03
Diagnostics
Network Port
Table 86 Network Port diagnostics
PORT GOOD N/A N/A N/A

DIAGNOSTIC
SETUP ERROR Controller/network Rack 1 monitor blocks Correct the setup problem.
names determined on COMPORT DIAG is set to
network are illegal FAILED.
Rack 1 monitor blocks

RACK OK pin is turned off.
ASYS (SYSTEM
MONITOR) blocks HW
OK pin is turned off.
NO IP ADDRESS IP address is not Same as above 1. If a DHCP server is present,

configured download a configuration that
uses DHCP.
2. Enter an IP address.
HARDWARE Ethernet port tests Same as above Replace CPU module

FAILURE failed during power-
up.
DHCP Failure DHCP is configured, Same as above 1. Check the DHCP server.
and no IP address
has been granted. 2. Download a configuration with
DHCP required.
9/03
Diagnostics
Expansion I/O Port

Table 87 Expansion I/O Port diagnostics
RACK n GOOD Comm port is N/A N/A
PORT functioning properly or
comm port is not
used
RACK n DATA LINK The communications 1. Related rack monitor 1. Use the OI to determine which rack
PORT FAILURE to a particular rack is blocks RACK OK pin is is experiencing the comm errors. Verify
resulting in a lot of turned off. that the expansion rack should be in
communication 2. Depending on the the configuration
errors. nature of the 2. Verify that the jumpers on the
communication errors, the scanner are setup for the correct rack
associated rack monitor address.
blocks module 3. If a hub is used, check that all cables
diagnostics, and pins could are properly connected to the hub,
be affected. proper crossover cables are used, and
3. Associated racks that hub is powered.
COMPORT DIAGNOSTIC 4. Cycle power to the rack.
is set to FAILED. 5. Cycle power to the hub.
4. Rack 1 COMPORT 6. Replace the expansion racks power
DIAGNOSTIC is set to supply.
FAILED.
7. Replace the expansion rack.
8. Replace the expansion racks
scanner board.
9. Replace the main CPU.
RACK n HARDWARE The power-up test of 1. All rack monitor block Replace main-CPU module
PORT FAILURE the expansion rack XIO PORT DIAG are set to
ethernet controller HWFAIL and COMPORT
failed. DIAGNOSTIC is set to
FAIL.
2. All rack monitor block
RACK OK pins are turned
off.
3. All modules in the
configuration have their
diagnostic set to
MOD_NOCOMM, their
rack monitor module fail
pin is turned on., and the
rack monitor blocks RACK
OK pin is turned off.
4. SYSTEM MONITOR
blocks HW OK pin is
turned off.
5. The statuses for the AO,
AI, DI, DO channels that
are affected are set to
BAD_CHANNEL.
9/03
Unit Setup
Access
Main menu.
Description
Unit Setup gives you access to the setup and troubleshooting functions.
UNIT SETUP MAY06

11:30
CONTROLLER STATUS
SET MODE
SET TIME AND DATE
SET SECURITY
REVIEW SECURITY
SET LANGUAGE
COMMUNICATIONS
SELF-TESTS
CALIBRATE AI
CALIBRATE AO
CHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
9/03
Unit Setup
Controller Status
Controller Status
This is a read-only display giving the status of various controller parameters.
Table 88 Controller status details
Feature Description
CONTROLLER Configured controller name

NAME
NETWORK NAME The network name to which the controller belongs.
LOCAL ALIAS A locally referenced alias for the controller.
MODE Controllers mode of operation:
RUN: Controller is running normally.
PROG: Controller is in Program mode.
OFLN: Controller is in Offline mode.
FAULT: A fault was found reading the Controller switch.
NO COMM: This is displayed if controller is not responding.
REV LEVEL Revision level of the Controller software.
FREQUENCY Line frequency. Used for configuring the conversion time of the A/D converter.
LOOP CAPACITY Maximum number of loops allowed by the controller.
CYCLE TIME The analog control cycle time in seconds. This value is determined from the
execution time estimated from the configured control scheme.
Set Mode
This display lets you change the Controllers operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom
right of the display.
Table 89 Set mode details
Feature Description
CONTROLLER MODE Current mode of the controller. See Table 90.
SET CONTROLLER RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

MODE
OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.
PROGRAM: Select this:
Before performing AI and AO Calibration.
To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.
Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the
controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the
Program mode for changes whenever possible.
9/03
Unit Setup
Set Mode
Table 90 Controller modes defined
Mode Function Blocks Executed? Output status? Effect upon return to RUN mode?
RUN Yes Outputs updated None
OFFLINE No Outputs held Resume
PROGRAM No Outputs off Cold start
ATTENTION
You can not change the controller mode from this display if the controllers mode switch is in
the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked
positions, this display will show the message MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.
TIP
If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here,
following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.
Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules,
sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.
In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of
some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.
In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left
off.
9/03
Unit Setup
Set Time and Date
Set Time and Date

Allows you to set the time and date displayed on screens.
Table 91 Set time and date details
Feature Description
HOURS Enter the hours for the current time.
MINUTES Enter the minutes for the current time.
MONTH Enter the current month.
DAY Enter the current day of the month.
YEAR Enter the current year.
DATE FORMAT US: MMDDYY
INT: DDMMYY
Press Escape to get a popup menu where you can save or ignore the changes made.
Set Security/Review Security

This feature lets you secure various displays or features with a security code. If security is enabled for a
display or function, access is not possible without first entering the code.
NOTE: On Model 559, the Up and Down arrow keys let you scroll through the complete menu.
Table 92 Set security details
Feature Description
ENABLE SECURITY This is a master enabling switch. Set this to YES to enable security on any of the
engineer or operator secured items that are also set to YES. If this is set to NO, no
engineer or operator secured items will be secured, even if they are set to YES.
ENGINEER SEC This is a higher level of security than the operator security code because it secures
CODE access to off-line functions such as calibration. Choose a 3-digit code to be used to
secure the item below.
SET UNIT Set this to YES to secure the displays and menu items in Table 93 under SET UNIT. Set
to NO to allow unrestricted access.
FUNCTION BLOCK Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA EDIT displays. Set to NO to
EDIT allow unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected items.
EDIT MENUS Set this to YES to secure Edit Device Control and HOA operate display Edit menus. Set
to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected items.
OPERATOR SEC Enter a 3-digit code to be used to secure the items below.
CODE
AUTO/MANUAL Set this to YES to secure loop mode AUTO/MANUAL operation. Set to NO to allow
unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected items.
9/03
Unit Setup
Feature Description
LSP/RSP Set this to YES to secure changing between Local and Remote Setpoints. Set to NO to
allow unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected items.
PROGRAMMER/ Set this to YES to secure setpoint program, scheduler, and sequencer operation. Set to
SCHEDULER/ NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected items.
SEQUENCER
OPERATIONS
SETUP Set this to YES to secure access to setup items. Set to NO to allow unrestricted access.
See Table 93 for affected items.
RECIPE LOAD/ Set this to YES to secure recipe and variable operation. Set to NO to allow unrestricted
VAR. EDIT access. See Table 93 for affected items.
DISK UTIL / DATA Set this to YES to secure access to disk utilities, data storage controls, and load data
STORAGE storage settings). Set to NO to allow unrestricted access. See Table 93 for affected
items.
LOG ON/OFF Set this to YES to secure access to the Log On/Off display. See Table 93 for affected
items.
Accessing a secured area

1. The security access display is shown when you are about to enter a secured area.
2. Use Increment/Decrement and Left Arrow to select the code. Press Enter to gain access.
TIP
1. If you forget your security code, see Security Bypass Procedure.

2. An item is secured only if all the following conditions are met.
ENABLE SECURITY is set to YES.
Non-zero security code.
Security category (for example, SETUP) is set to YES.
3. If a display or function is secured, then all displays and functions subordinate to it are also
indirectly secured. Once you enter the security code for a display or menu, you do not have
to enter a security code for each subordinate display and function. For example, Loops is
under the SETUP security category. If SETUP security is enabled with YES, the operator
must enter the operator security code after selecting Loops from the Main Menu. Once this
code is entered, all menus and displays under Loops are accessible.
Table 93 summarizes the securable displays and menu items.
9/03
Unit Setup
Table 93 Displays and functions that can be secured
ENG SEC CODE OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

SET FB EDIT AUTO LSP / SET- PROGRAMMER/ RECIPE DISK LOG
UNIT EDIT MENUS / MAN RSP UP SCHEDULER/ / VAR UTIL/ ON/
SEQUENCER EDIT DATA OFF
OPERATIONS STOR-
AGE
UNIT SETUP*
SET MODE X
SET TIME & DATE X
SET SECURITY X
FILE NAME X
SELECTION
SELF-TESTS X
CALIBRATE AI X
CALIBRATE AO X
RS-232 CONFIG PORT** X
RS-485 CONFIG PORT** X
MODBUS SLAVE X
DEVICES**
SINGLE LOOP TREND X
DISPLAY
LOOP TUNING DISPLAY X
LOOP TUNE CONSTANTS X
DISPLAY
LOOP CONTROL SETUP X
DISPLAY
SWITCH SP X
CARBON LOOP SETUP X
DISPLAY
LOOP ALARM SETPTS X
DISPLAY
LOOP LIMITS DISPLAY X
MULTILOOP SUMMARY X
DISPLAY
MULTILOOP FACEPLATE X
DISPLAYS
SINGLE LOOP NUMERIC X
DISPLAY
A/M BIAS DISPLAY X
LOOP CONTROL X
DISPLAY
SWITCH SP X
RECIPES*
EDIT X
LOAD X
9/03
Unit Setup
ENG SEC CODE OPERATOR SECURITY CODE

SET FB EDIT AUTO LSP / SET- PROGRAMMER/ RECIPE DISK LOG
UNIT EDIT MENUS / MAN RSP UP SCHEDULER/ / VAR UTIL/ ON/
SEQUENCER EDIT DATA OFF
OPERATIONS STOR-
AGE
MAIN MENU
LOOPS X
SP PROGRAMMERS X
SP SCHEDULER X
SEQUENCERS X
DISK UTILITIES X
DATA STORAGE*
STORAGE CONTROLS X
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS X
SINGLE SPP OPERATE
DISPLAY
OPERATE X
SETPOINT SCHEDULER X
OPERATE
SEQUENCER OPERATE X
RAMP EDIT DISPLAY
TRANSFER RATE UP X
TRANSFER RATE DN X
LAG TIME X
STAGE EDIT DISPLAY
ON DELAY TIME X
OFF DELAY TIME X
INTERLOCK PREV X
INTERLOCK NEXT X
ALTERNATOR EDIT DISPLAY
EDIT ALTERNATOR (F2) X
EDIT ALTERNATOR STYLE X
RECIPE LOAD DISPLAY X
DEVICE CONTROL X
OPERATE DISPLAY
DEVICE CONTROL EDIT
DISPLAY
EDIT TIMERS X
RESET FAILURE X
HOA OPERATE DISPLAY X
HOA EDIT DISPLAY
HOA SOURCE X
SET STATE X
OVERVIEW DISPLAY X
LOG ON/OFF
*Accessed through Main Menu.

** These displays are accessed via the following sequence of menu items: Main Menu, Alarms/Events/Diags,
Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports and Main Menu, Unit Setup, Communications.
X = this item and items subordinate to it can be secured.
9/03
Unit Setup
Set Language
Set Language
Sets the language of all displays.
Table 94 Set language details
Feature Description
SET LANGUAGE Choose between English, French, Italian, Spanish, German.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Communications
Access
Main menu, Unit Setup
Main menu, Alarm/Event/Diagnostics, Controller Diagnostics, Comm Ports - See 149
Overview
This menu lets you see and edit settings for these controller communications ports:
RS-232 Configuration port (page 162)
RS-485 OI port (page 165)
Network port (page 166)

View host connections (page 167)
View network peer connections (page 168)
Network peer statistics (page 169)
Expansion I/O port (page 172).
Modbus Slave Devices (page 173)
Modbus Slave Details (page 173)

COMMUNICATION PORTS
RS-232 CONFIG PORT GOOD

RS-485 OI PORT GOOD
NETWORK PORT GOOD
EXPANSION I/O PORT GOOD
MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES
Figure 54 Communications ports display
The diagnostic condition of each port is displayed to the right of the port description. See the section on
Communication Ports Diagnostics (page 149) for an explanation of these diagnostic conditions.
To access the detailed information for any port, scroll to the desired port and press ENTER.
If the controllers RS-232 Port is being used to host one or more Modbus Slave devices the message NO
MASTER PORT may appear next to the MODBUS SLAVE DEVICES menu item. This message indicates
that the RS-232 Port protocol is set to a value other than Modbus Master. Call up the RS-232 Config
Port display and set the protocol to Modbus Master.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
RS-232 Port
The controllers RS-232 port can be set-up as an ELN Configuration port, a Modbus Master port, or a
Modbus Slave port. The ELN protocol allows the controller to communicate with the Hybrid Control
Designer package on the PC using the proprietary ELN protocol. The Modbus Master protocol allows the
controller to act as a Modbus Master, retrieving data from other instruments that have been configured as
Modbus slave devices. The three Modbus Slave protocols allow the controller act as a slave to various host
devices, including a PC running HC Designer.
Table 95 describes the diagnostic and status information available for this port.
Table 95 RS-232 Port diagnostic and status information

Status Description
PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows the overall condition of the RS-232 port. See the list of RS-232
Port diagnostic conditions on page 150.
PORT STATUS This is the current status of the port. The possible status conditions are:
GOOD: the protocol is set to ELN.
REQUIRES SETUP: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave
protocols, and the Slave Address is set to 255. Messages on the
communication link are ignored in this state.
OFFLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and
the Slave Port Enable is set to DISABLE. Messages on the
communication link are ignored in this state.
ONLINE: the protocol is set to one of the Modbus Slave protocols, and
the Slave Port Enable is set to ENABLE. Messages on the
communication link are being processed in this state.
NO MODBUS SLAVE BLOCKS: the protocol is set to Modbus Master,
but there are no Modbus slave function blocks present in the controllers
configuration.
PROGRAM MODE: the protocol is set to Modbus Master, but the
controller is in Program Mode. The controller does not scan the slave
devices in this state.
ELN SLAVE: the protocol is set to Modbus Master, but the controller is in
Program Locked Mode. The RS-232 port automatically reverts to ELN
protocol and the controller becomes a slave device whenever the mode
selection switch is placed in the Program Locked position.
SCANNING SLAVES: the protocol is set to Modbus Master, and the
controller is actively scanning the slave devices attached to the RS-232
port.
MESSAGES RECEIVED The number of messages that were received and processed correctly.
DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller. If the
protocol is Modbus Master, the errors may be due to a slave device that
does not reply when it is scanned. Refer to the section Troubleshooting
Data Link Errors (page 175) for more information.
APPLICATION ERRORS The number of messages that were responded to with an exception
code. For example, application errors can be caused by (a) writing to a
read-only register, (b) accessing a register that is not supported by the
slave device, or (c) using a Modbus function code that is not supported
by the slave device.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Table 96 shows all of the parameters that can be configured for the controllers RS-232 port. The actual
number of parameters that can be configured at any time depends on the protocol selected. Table 97 shows
the relationship between the setup parameters and each protocol.
Table 96 RS-232 Port setup parameters
Setup parameter Description
PROTOCOL ELN: The default protocol, used to communicate with the HC

Designer configuration software.
MODBUS MASTER: The controller acts as a Modbus Master device

on the communication link.
MODBUS SLAVE MULTI: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave

device. This protocol allows more than one slave device to be
present on the communications link (multi-drop).
MODBUS SLAVE PTP: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave

device. This protocol can be used if the controller is the only slave
device on the link (Point-to-point).
MODBUS SLAVE MODEM: The controller acts as a Modbus Slave

device. This protocol provides the extended delays that are needed
to access the controller via a modem.
SLAVE ADDRESS (1-247 OR This is the address of the controller on the Modbus link when one of
255) the three Modbus Slave protocols is selected. All devices on the link
must have a unique Modbus address. The address may be set to a
value of 1 to 247, or it may be set to 255. A value of 255 disables
the port for this controller.
SLAVE PORT ENABLE This item allows you to enable or disable the port:
ENABLE: The port will respond to communication requests.
DISABLE: The port will ignore communication requests.
BAUD RATE (BPS) Select 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bits per second.
MODBUS PARITY Select None, Odd, or Even parity.
MODBUS STOP BITS Select 1 or 2 Stop Bits.
DOUBLE REGISTER FORMAT Under the Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating point number
requires two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes.
The stuffing order of the bytes within these registers differs among
Modbus devices. To provide compatibility with the various hosts, the
double-register format is configurable. The selections are:
FP B Big Endian format Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1

FP L Little Endian format Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4
FP BB Big Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2
FP LB Little Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3
CLEAR STATISTICS This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero
(Messages Received, Data Link Errors, and Application Errors).
Note: the counters will only be reset if the controller is in Run Mode.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Table 97 Protocol selection versus setup parameters for the RS-232 Port
Protocol selection
ELN Modbus Modbus Modbus Slave Modbus Slave

Master Slave Point to Point Modem
Setup parameter Multidrop (PTP)
Baud Rate (BPS) X X X X X
Modbus Parity X X X NONE
Modbus Stop Bits X X X 1 BIT
Slave Address X X X
Slave Port Enable X X X
Double Register Format X X X
Note: When Modbus Slave Modem protocol is selected, the Modbus Parity and Modbus Stop Bits are fixed at
None and 1 Bit respectively and cannot be changed.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
RS-485 OI port
Table 98 RS-485 OI port details
Feature Description
PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows condition of OI port. See OI Port diagnostics on page 150
PORT STATUS Shows status of port (GOOD).
MESSAGES RECEIVED Number of messages that were received and processed correctly.
DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors detected by the controller (framing, overrun, etc).
These errors could be caused by electrical noise on the communications link or a bad
physical connection.
APPLICATION ERRORS Number of messages that were responded to with an exception error by the controller.
PROTOCOL ELN
BAUD RATE (BPS) The current communication speed of the RS-485 port, 38400 or 57600 bits per
second.
BAUD RATE (BPS) This item allows you to change the speed of the communication link that connects the
OI and the controller. The choices are 38400 or 57600 bits per second.
CLEAR STATISTICS This item resets the message counters for this port back to zero (Messages Received,
Data Link Errors, and Application Errors). Note: the counters will only be reset if the
controller is in Run Mode.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Network Port
Table 99 Network port details
Feature Description
PORT DIAGNOSTIC Shows condition of network port. See Network Port diagnostics on page 151
CONTROLLER NAME Configured controller name
NETWORK NAME The network name to which the controller belongs.
LOCAL ALIAS A locally referenced alias for the controller.
MAC ADDRESS The controllers Media Access Control address.
IP ADDRESS The controllers Internet Protocol address.
SUBNET MASK The controllers subnet mask address.
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS The Internet Protocol address for the controllers gateway device.
DOUBLE REGISTER Each IEEE 32-bit floating point number requires two consecutive registers (four bytes,
FORMAT MSB=4, LSB=1 in byte order below) starting with the register defined as the starting
register for the information. The stuffing order of the bytes into the two registers differs
among Modbus hosts. To provide compatibility, the Double register format is
configurable. Selections are:
FPB Floating Point Big Endian Format Byte order 4, 3, 2, 1 (Default)
FP BB Floating Point Big Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 3, 4, 1, 2
FP L Floating Point Little Endian Format Byte order 1, 2, 3, 4
FP LB Floating Point Little Endian with byte-swapped Byte order 2, 1, 4, 3
VIEW HOST Shows the network host connections display. See View Host Connections, Table 100
CONNECTIONS
VIEW PEER Shows the network peer connections display. See View Peer Connections, Table 102
CONNECTIONS
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
View Host Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each virtual connections status and details.
NETWORK HOST CONNECTIONS
CONNECTION 1: GOOD CONNECTION 4: GOOD

PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4 HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED 100 MESSAGES RECEIVED 100
APPLICATION ERRORS 0 APPLICATION ERRORS 0
CLEAR STATISTICS CLEAR STATISTICS
CONNECTION 2: GOOD
PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP CONNECTION 5: GOOD
HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4 PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP
MESSAGES RECEIVED 100 HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4
APPLICATION ERRORS 0 MESSAGES RECEIVED 100
CLEAR STATISTICS APPLICATION ERRORS 0
CLEAR STATISTICS
CONNECTION 3: GOOD
PROTOCOL MODBUS TCP
HOST IP ADDRESS 103.99.56.4
MESSAGES RECEIVED 100
APPLICATION ERRORS 0
CLEAR STATISTICS
Figure 55 View host connections (Model 1042 example*)
Table 100 View network host details
Feature Description
CONNECTION n Shows condition of each virtual connection.

See Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators, Table 101
PROTOCOL * The protocol used by the host to communicate with the controller (Modbus TCP).
HOST IP ADDRESS * The IP address of the host device that is using this connection.
MESSAGES RECEIVED * Number of messages received without errors.
APPLICATION ERRORS* Number of message requests that resulted in an exception.
CLEAR STATISTICS * Resets to zero the number of messages received and application errors.
* For Model 559, select a connection number and press "Enter" to display connection information.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Table 101 Host Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators
Parameter Status Possible Cause Controller Action User Action
Network GOOD N/A N/A N/A

Host
Connections
Diagnostics
APPLICATION At least one 1. Rack 1 monitor At host, determine which

ERROR response to a host block's COMPORT message is causing the
resulted in an DIAG is set to exception code and fix.
exception code. WARNING.
2. Rack 1 monitor
block's RACK OK
pin is turned off.
3. ASYS block's HW
OK pin is turned off
View Peer Connections

Accessed from Network Port display. Shows each peers address and diagnostic.
Table 102 View peer connection details
Feature Description
CONTROLLER NAME Scroll to any controller name and press Enter to see statistics. See Table 103
IP ADDRESS Internet Protocol address of the peer controller.
DIAGNOSTIC See Host/Peer Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators, Table 104
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
View Network Peer statistics

Accessed from View Peer Connections display.
Table 103 View network peer statistics details
Feature Description
PEER CONTROLLER Controller name of the peer device. All peer devices must have the same network
NAME name. All peer devices that share a common network name must have unique
controller names.
PEER IP ADDRESS IP address of the peer. The IP address is automatically determined when a peer
device is discovered via its network and controller names.
DIAGNOSTIC See Peer Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators, Table 104
MESSAGES RECEIVED Number of messages received from the peer device.
MESSAGES Number of messages sent to the peer device.

TRANSMITTED
WRITE REQUESTS Number of write event messages sent to the peer device.
WRITE REQUEST Number of write event messages that have not been acknowledged by the peer device
FAILURES within the scan rate configured for the peer data exchange. A non-zero value means
the network is congested and message transfer is being impeded.
PRODUCER FAILURES Number of times the peer device has not responded to a data exchange connection
request. Non-zero value means the peer device is not available because the controller
is in Program mode, controller power is off, or controller name does not exist in the
network. The network is defined as all devices that:
are on the same physical network,
are within the IP address range per the configured IP mask,
share the same peer network name.
CLEAR STATISTICS Reset to zero the number of messages received and application errors.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Table 104 Peer Connection Diagnostics Status Indicators
Parameter Status Possible Cause Controller Action User Action
Network GOOD N/A Peer is connected and N/A

Peer updating normally
Connections
Diagnostics
APPLICATION The peer N/A 1. Reset the controller to

ERROR connection could restart the UDP/IP
not be established protocol stack and reset
due to an internal buffer allocations.
program problem.
2. Contact Honeywell
Technical Assistance if the
problem exists.
SETUP The peer device The error will occur Contact Honeywell Technical
ERROR indicated that the when an incompatibility Assistance if the status
one or more data exists between peer occurs.
item is not valid. devices with regard to
variable or signal
assignments.
This error should not

occur when exchanging
data between HC900
controllers.
PEER FAIL The assigned peer N/A 1. Check the controller name
could not be and network name of the
located on the peer device to assure that
network. they match that specific
PDE block.
2. Check that the IP

addresses of the peer
devices are all within the
range of the IP mask.
3. Check that the peer

devices have the same IP
subnet mask. See
Network parameters for IP
mask setting.
PORT FAIL The peer data N/A 1. Reset the controller to

exchange IO restart the Ethernet IO
subsystem could hardware and reassign
not be started due processor IO mapping.
to internal resource
problem. 2. Contact Honeywell
continued Technical Assistance if the
problem exists.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
NOT The assigned peer 1. If this status persists

STARTED IO connection has during run time, check that
not yet been the peer device is properly
attempted. Normal connected and that the
state during startup control name and network
and during name is correct.
configuration mode.
This status should
automatically
change to GOOD
after both peer
controllers are in
the RUN mode.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Expansion I/O Port
COMMUNICATION PORT
EXPANSION I/O PORT
TOTAL RACK 2 RACK 3 RACK 4 RACK 5
DIAGNOSTICS 1 GOOD H/W FAIL GOOD GOOD
MESSAGES 1000 200 300 200 300
LINK ERRORS 0 0 0 0 0
CLEAR ALL CLEAR 2 CLEAR 3 CLEAR 4 CLEAR 5
Figure 56 Model 1042 view network host connections
EXPANSION I/O PORTS

PAGE 1 OF 3
RACK 2 DIAGNOSTICS H/W/FAIL

MESSAGES 0
LINK ERRS 0
CLEAR STATISTICS
RACK 3 DIAGNOSTICS H/W/FAIL

MESSAGES 0
LINK ERRS 0
CLEAR STATISTICS
Figure 57 Model 559 view network host connections
On Model 559 use Page up and Page down to view Rack 4, Rack 5, and Total Diagnostics
Table 105 Expansion I/O Port details
Feature Description
DIAGNOSTICS TOTAL: Total number of all rack diagnostics other than Good.
RACK n: See Expansion I/O Port on page 152 for explanation of the status.
MESSAGES TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks.
RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack.
LINK ERRORS TOTAL: Total number of message attempts to all racks that resulted in failed
response.
RACK n: Number of message attempts to the rack that resulted in failed response.
CLEAR ALL Reset to zero the Messages and Link Errors counters.
CLEAR STATISTICS Reset the messages and link error counters for a single rack to zero.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Modbus Slave Devices display

This display gives you an overview of the individual slave devices attached to the controllers RS-232 port
when the port is set-up as a Modbus Master. Table 106 describes the information located on this display.
Table 106 Modbus Slave Devices display
Display Field Description
SLAVE DEVICE This column shows the name of the slave device and its relative position
(1 through 16).
Use the arrow keys to select an individual slave device to get more
detailed status information. Press ENTER to call-up the Modbus Slave
Details display.
IN SCAN This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.
YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan
rate is computed by the controller.
NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not

being scanned at all. The status may be NO for any of the following
reasons:
the ENABLE SCAN setting is NO (see the Modbus Slave Details

display).
the COMM QUALITY for this slave device is BAD or NONE (see the
Modbus Slave Details display).
the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.
the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.
the RS-232 port protocol is not set to Modbus Master.
Modbus Slave Details display

This display allows you to see the status of an individual slave device and place the slave device in and out
of scan. You can access this display from the Modbus Slave Devices overview display. Table xx describes
the information present on this display.
9/03
Unit Setup
Communications
Table 107 Modbus Slave Details display
IN SCAN This column shows the current scan status of each slave device.
YES: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate. The scan
rate is computed by the controller.
NO: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate, or it is not

being scanned at all. The possible reasons are:
SCAN ENABLED is set to NO.
COMM QUALITY is NONE or BAD.
the Modbus address of the slave device is set to 255.
the slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.
The RS-232 port protocol is not set to Modbus Master.
SCAN ENABLED YES: Scanning has been enabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection
below)
NO: Scanning has been disabled (see the ENABLE SCAN selection
below)
COMM QUALITY NONE: This slave device is not defined in the controller configuration.
GOOD: The slave device is being scanned at its optimum rate because
its operation on the communications link is acceptable.
BAD: The slave device is being scanned at a reduced rate because it

has experienced an abnormal number of failed responses. Refer to the
section Troubleshooting a Comm Quality Problem below.
MESSAGES RECEIVED The number of messages that were received and processed correctly
since the last Cold Start.
DATA LINK ERRORS The number of basic link-level errors generated by this slave since the
last Cold Start. Refer to the section Troubleshooting Data Link Errors
for more information.
APPLICATION ERRORS The number of application errors generated by this slave since the last
Cold Start. Application errors are messages that the slave device
responded to with an exception code. For example, application errors
can be caused by (a) writing to a read-only register, (b) accessing a
register that is not supported by the slave device, or (c) using a Modbus
function code that is not supported by the slave device.
DOUBLE REGISTER Under Modbus protocol, each IEEE 32-bit floating-point number requires
FORMAT two consecutive Modbus registers, for a total of four bytes. The stuffing
order of the bytes within these registers differs among Modbus devices.
To provide compatibility with the various devices, the double-register
format is configurable. The selections are:
FP B Big Endian format Byte order: 4, 3, 2, 1

FP L Little Endian format Byte order: 1, 2, 3, 4
FP BB Big Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 3, 4, 1, 2
FP LB Little Endian with byte-swap Byte order: 2, 1, 4, 3
ENABLE SCAN Use this item to enable or disable scanning of the slave device. Select
YES to enable scanning for this device.
9/03
Unit Setup
File Name Selection
Select NO to disable scanning of this device.
Troubleshooting a Comm Quality problem

If a slave device is reporting a Comm Quality value of BAD, check the following items:
1. Verify that the slave device is powered-up.
2. Verify that the slave device is wired correctly.
3. Verify that the slave device has the correct slave address.
4. Verify that all slave devices on the link have a unique slave address.
5. Verify that the slave device has the correct baud rate and parity settings.
6. Verify that all slave devices on the link have the same baud rate and parity settings.
7. Verify that the slave is set-up for half-duplex operation.
8. If all slave devices report a BAD status, check the physical connection of the link to the controllers
RS-232 port. If this connection is OK, check the connection to each slave device on the link.
9. If there is more than one slave device on the link, verify that the RS-232/RS-485 converter box is
working correctly.
10. Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the
terminating resistors is correct.
Troubleshooting Data Link Errors

Data Link Errors can be caused by electrical noise, physical wiring problems, or incorrect configuration
settings. If a Master or Slave device is reporting Data Link Errors, check the following items:
1. Verify that the physical wiring of the communication link is correct.
2. Verify that the physical wiring is shielded from electrical noise.
3. Verify that all devices on the link have the correct baud rate and parity settings.
4. Verify that all terminating resistors are installed properly. Verify that the ohm-value of the
terminating resistors is correct.
5. If the protocol is Modbus Master, the errors may be due to a slave device that does not reply when
it is scanned.
File Name Selection

To expedite disk storage using DOS files, a list of file names may be created in advance. The operator
selects from this list when naming profiles, recipes, schedules, sequences, and configurations about to be
stored on the disk.
9/03
Unit Setup
File Name Selection
This display lets you create and modify the list of 25, 6-character file names.

FILENAME1 CONFIG
FILENAME2 PROFIL
FILENAME3 RECIPE
FILENAME4 STORAG
FILENAME5 NAME5
FILENAME6 NAME6
FILENAME7 NAME7
FILENAME8 NAME8
FILENAME9 NAME9
FILENAME10 NAME10
FILENAME11 NAME11
Figure 58 File name selection

Table 108 File name selection details
Feature Description
FILENAMEn To modify a name, move the cursor to the name and press Enter. Next, use the
Increment and Decrement keys to change each character in the six character name, or
use an optionally attached AT-keyboard to type the name directly. Press Enter to keep
the new name.
Do not use backslashes\\ or decimal places in file names. Use DOS compatible file
names.
9/03
Unit Setup
Self Tests
Self Tests
This function lets you perform tests to verify proper functioning of the OI.
Press Escape to end any test.
SELF-TESTS
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
DISK READ/WRITE TEST
Figure 59 Self tests

Table 109 Self tests details
Feature Description
KEYBOARD TEST After selecting this, the display goes blank. Press any key to test that keythe keys
name will appear if it is functioning properly. If the keys name does not appear, the key
is faulty. The test can be run using the AT keyboard as well as the local keypad, but only
the keys that are mapped to the keypad are exercised. See Table 5. Press Esc to exit
this test.
DISPLAY TEST After selecting this, the display shows a spectrum of all possible 16 colors. If these colors
are not shown, the display is faulty. Press Enter to cycle through the test displays.
DISK READ/WRITE This test verifies the operation of the disk drive.
TEST
Insert a blank floppy disk or Zip disk into the drive and close the door. Press Enter to
begin the test. After a few seconds, the display will indicate whether the test passed or
failed. Refer to Messages on page 267 for details about any error messages that may
occur.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Calibrate AI
ATTENTION
Do not access this menu while the Hybrid Control Designer Utilities Calibrate Controller
Analog I/O dialog window is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long
as both displays are shown; you must exit either display to do a calibration.
Overview
Analog inputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span unless specifically noted in the range
specifications. A field calibration may be performed on any analog input on a point by point basis to
optimize measurement accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are retained in non-volatile memory
and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from the calibration procedure.
Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Input module itself. Therefore, once
a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being recalibrated.
However, the controller will automatically restore a channels Factory calibration settings under the
following conditions:
The channel is reconfigured to use a different gain setting. This may happen if you change the input type
of the channel (for example, change from a TC to a Voltage or RTD input type).
The AI module detects an error in its stored field calibration information. In this case, factory
calibration is restored for all of the channels on the affected module.
Note that you must configure a channels input type and range before you try to calibrate it. The
calibration will be performed against the gain setting associated with the input type and range. If you
change the input type after calibrating, the module will automatically restore the Factory calibration
settings for that channel. If necessary, you can use the PC Designers Monitor Mode feature to determine
whether a given channel is using Factory or field calibration.
Calibration equipment
For best results use a calibration source accurate to 1 microvolt.
You must use a voltage source and copper lead-wire for channels that are configured as thermocouple
and voltage inputs. Do not use a compensated calibrator and TC extension lead-wire to calibrate TC
channels.
Note that Cold Junction sensor and Analog Input calibrations are performed separately; you do not have
to calibrate the CJ sensors before calibrating your TC input channels.
If you are calibrating current-type inputs (0-20 ma or 4-20 ma) and you are using an external shunt
resistor, we recommend that you calibrate the channel using a current-source with the actual shunt
resistor installed on the terminals. This will allow you to calibrate out any inaccuracies in the shunt
resistor. A high-precision shunt resistor should always be used.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Calibrate AI menu
Calibrate AI lets you
change the controller mode from the menu to program or off-line,
calibrate any analog input channel,
calibrate cold junction temperature,
restore a channels original factory calibration,
restore a cold junctions factory calibration.
Set Controller Mode

When you select Set Controller Mode from the menu you can change the Controllers operating mode. It
has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.
The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.
Select OFF-LINE or PROGRAM to calibrate the AI.
If you press ENTER while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:
THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN
THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,
AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.
PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT.
Press ESC to return to Calibrate AI menu.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Calibrate AI channel
Calibrate AI Channel guides you through a procedure for calibrating an analog input channel. Perform the
steps in the order of the menu. Refer to the example AI calibration procedure.
Table 110 Calibrate AI channel details
Feature Description
STATUS This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance:
READY
CONNECT 0% AI
CALIBRATING 0% AI
CONNECT 100% AI
CALIBRATING 100% AI
SAVE AI CALIBRATION
AI CAL FAILED or DONE
REFERENCE Indicates numeric input reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
module or channel.
TIME REM Time remaining until the selected calibration step is complete.
RACK Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the AI to be calibrated.
MODULE
CHANNEL
SELECT INPUT Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.
CALIBRATE 0% INPUT Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to
calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is
complete.
CALIBRATE 100% Set the calibration source to the value shown next to REFERENCE, then select this to
INPUT calibrate. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when calibration is
complete.
SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the channel calibration.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Example of AI calibration
This example assumes the channel has already been configured as a Type T thermocouple, Range 300 to
700 Degrees F.
Table 111 Example of AI calibration
Step Action
1 Connect the calibrator to the channel to be calibrated. Use a millivolt source and copper wire;
do not use TC extension lead-wire.
2 Put the controller into Program or Off-line mode.
3 Access CALIBRATE AI display.
4 Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the input channel to be
calibrated.
5 Press Enter to SELECT INPUT. The selected channel will have its 0% range data presented in
the upper portion of the calibration display. In this example, the value 5.341 millivolts will be
shown.
6 Connect an appropriate input source to the channel to be calibrated and adjust to the 0% value
specified in the upper portion of the display.
7 Select CALIBRATE 0% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate the
time remaining to recalculate a new 0% calibration value.
8 The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% value (19.097 millivolts in this example).
Apply this value to the input.
9 Select CALIBRATE 100% INPUT and press Enter, the upper portion of the display will indicate
the time remaining to recalculate a new 100% calibration value.
10 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the input.
11 Place controller back in Run mode.
ATTENTION
Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps
of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Calibrate CJ temperature
Each analog input card has two Cold Junction (CJ) sensors that are used in making thermocouple
measurements. These sensors may be re-calibrated in the field if desired to optimize thermocouple
measurement accuracy using the following procedure.
ATTENTION
An inaccurate CJ calibration will affect the accuracy of your thermocouple measurements. If

you are going to perform CJ calibration, you must use a very accurate temperature measuring
device. It is also important that you allow the temperature around the controllers terminal
block to stabilize for 10 minutes or more before you take the CJ temperature reading.
Perform the steps in the order shown in the following table.

Table 112 Calibrate CJ temp details
Feature Description
STATUS This displays the status at each step of calibration. In order of appearance:
READY
MEASURE TEMPERATURE AT SELECTED CJ
CALIBRATING CJ
CJ CAL FAILED
SAVE CJ CALIBRATION
REFERENCE Indicates CJ temperature reading in Degrees C. Also indicates an invalid module or

channel.
TIME REM Time remaining until calibration is complete.

RACK Enter the rack number, module number, and channel number of the CJ sensor to be
MODULE calibrated. Channel 1 is the top CJ sensor, Channel 2 is the bottom sensor.
CHANNEL
SELECT CJ INPUT Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.
ENTER MEASURED Place your temperature measuring device at the terminal that is closest to the selected
CJ VALUE (IN CJ sensor. Allow the environment around the terminal block to stabilize for at least 10
DEGREES C) minutes before taking the temperature reading. Enter the measured temperature here,
in Degrees C.
CALIBRATE CJ INPUT Select this to start calibration. Calibration takes 30 seconds. Status will indicate when
calibration is complete.
SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the calibration.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Example of CJ calibration
TIP
Press ESC at any time to abort calibration.

If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps of
the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.
Press ESC as needed to back up to the UNIT SETUP menu and use SET MODE to return
the controller to the RUN mode.
From the CALIBRATE AI display, the factory calibration values may be re-installed and the
field calibration values removed on a point by point basis by using procedures that conform
in principal to those in the table below.
Table 113 Example of CJ calibration
Step Action
1 Put the controller into Program or Offline mode
2 Press Esc to access CALIBRATE CJ TEMP display.
3 Enter RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number (Channel 1 = top sensor,
channel 2 = bottom sensor).
4 Press Enter to SELECT CJ INPUT. The current value of the sensor is displayed in degrees
centigrade in the top area of the display.
5 Using a separate temperature sensor, measure the temperature of the CJ sensor in degrees
Centigrade (Note, CJ calibration is performed in Degrees Centigrade regardless of
thermocouple range preferences.).
6 Enter the temperature value measured in step 5 under ENTER MEASURED CJ VALUE (IN
DEGREES C)
7 Select CALIBRATE CJ INPUT and press Enter, the area at the top of the display indicated the
time remaining to recalculate a new CJ sensor measurement.
8 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the CJ
Channel.
9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 for CJ sensor 2.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AI
Restore AI factory calibration

This restores the selected channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of the
menu.
Table 114 Restore AI factory calibration details
Feature Description
STATUS Displays the status of the restore. Possible statuses are:

READY
RESTORING AI CAL
RESTORE AI FAILED
rack, module, or channel.
RACK Enter the rack, module, and channel to be restored.

MODULE
CHANNEL
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AO
Restore CJ factory calibration

This restores the selected cold junction sensor to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the
order of the menu.
Table 115 Restore CJ factory calibration details
Feature Description
STATUS This shows the status of the restore. Possible statuses are:
READY
RESTORING CJ CAL
RESTORE CJ FAILED
module or channel.
MODULE Enter the module containing the channel to be restored.
CHANNEL Enter the channel to be restored.
RESTORE Select this to restore calibration.
Calibrate AO
ATTENTION
You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller Analog I/O display while
the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be done as long as
both displays are shown; user must exit either display to do a calibration.
Overview
Analog outputs are factory calibrated to +/- 0.1% of span. A field calibration may be performed on any
analog output on a point by point basis to optimize accuracy. The factory calibration parameters are
retained in non-volatile memory and may be re-installed to undo a field calibration using selections from
the calibration procedure.
Both Factory and field calibration information is stored on the Analog Output module itself. Therefore,
once a module has been calibrated it can be moved to any slot position or any rack without being
recalibrated.
Calibrate AO menu
For increased accuracy, Calibrate AO lets you
change the controller mode from this menu to Program mode.
calibrate any analog output channel
restore an analog output channels original factory calibration
Before calibrating an analog output, you must put the Controller in Program mode. Select Set Controller
Mode from the menu and see for instructions.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AO
Set Controller Mode

When you select Set Controller Mode from the menu you can change the Controllers operating mode. It
has the same effect as if you changed the mode switch on the controller.
The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of the display.
Select PROGRAM in order to calibrate the AO.
If you press ENTER while Set Mode is RUN the following warning appears:
THE CONTROLLER OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN
THE RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE MODE,
AND DE-ENERGIZED IN PROGRAM MODE.
PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT.
Press ESC to return to Calibrate AO menu.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AO
Calibrate AO channel
This lets you calibrate any analog output channel. Perform the steps in the order of the menu.
Table 116 Calibrate AO channel details
Feature Description
STATUS This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are:
READY
CONNECT 0% AO
CALIBRATING 0% AO
CONNECT 100% AO
CALIBRATING 100% AO
AO CAL FAILED
SAVE AO CALIBRATION
REFERENCE Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid
module or channel.
RACK Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be calibrated.
MODULE
CHANNEL
SELECT OUTPUT Select this to verify that the selected module is installed in the controller.
ENTER 0% MEASURED Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in
VAL. mA here.
CALIBRATE 0% OUT Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.
ENTER 100% MEAS. Measure the actual output (as mA, mV or Volt) and then enter the measured value in
VALUE mA here.
CALIBRATE 100% OUT Select this to calibrate. Status will indicate when calibration is complete.
SAVE CALIBRATION Select this to save the channel calibration.
TIP
The range of an Analog Output is either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. If you are using an external
resistor to convert the current output to a voltage output, you can calibrate the AO channel
with the resistor in place. However, you must still enter the 0 and 100 percent calibration
values in milliamps; you cannot enter volts or millivolts.
AO calibration fails when the value entered by the user is outside of the following limits:
For 4 mA dc, the value entered must be between 3.3 and 4.7 mA dc.
For 20 mA dc, the value entered must be between 19.3 and 20.7 mA dc.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AO
Example of AO calibration
Table 117 Example of AO calibration
Step Action
1 Press the MENU key, select Unit Setup and Calibrate AO.
2 Place controller in PROGRAM Mode if prompted. (Be aware placing the controller in the
Program Mode will cause all controller outputs to turn off, typically turning off the process under
control.) Push ESC to return to Calibrate AO.
3 Select Calibrate Channel from available menu selections.
4 Enter the RACK number, MODULE number and CHANNEL number for the output channel to
be calibrated.
5 Press Enter to SELECT OUTPUT. The program will then check to see if the selected AO
exists. The selected channel will have its 0% reference data presented in the upper portion of
the calibration display.
6 Connect an appropriate meter to the output terminals, measure the mA output of the channel
being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER 0% MEASURED VAL. in mA.
7 Select CALIBRATE 0% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the 100%
entry is now available.
8 The upper portion of the display will indicate the 100% reference value. With an appropriate
meter measure the output of the channel being calibrated and enter this value in the ENTER
100% MEAS. VALUE in mA. .
9 Select CALIBRATE 100% OUTPUT and press Enter. If the calibration was successful the new
calibration may be saved.
10 Select SAVE CALIBRATION and press Enter to apply the recalculated values to the output
channel.
11 If during the procedure either of the tests fail the instrument will display an AO calibration Failed
message. This message may occur if the measured/entered data exceeds an appropriate
offset range for the input span.
12 Press ESC to return to the Calibrate AO menu and place the controller into the RUN mode.
Press ESC until a return to normal displays.
ATTENTION
Note: If the message INVALID SEQ appears at the top of the display, it means that the steps
of the calibration procedure have been performed out of sequence. Go to Step 1 and start
over again.
You can restore factory calibration settings by following the prompts available under the RESTORE AO
FACTORY CAL menu.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate AO
Restore AO factory calibration

This restores the selected AO channel to its factory calibration settings. Perform the steps in the order of
the menu.
Table 118 Restore AO factory calibration details
Feature Description
STATUS This shows the status of the calibration. In order of appearance statuses are:
READY
RESTORING AO CAL
RESTORE AO FAILED
REFERENCE Indicates output reference value and engineering units. Also indicates an invalid module
or channel.
RACK Enter the rack, module, and channel of the AO channel to be restored.
MODULE
CHANNEL
CHANNEL Enter an AO channel to calibrate.
SELECT OUTPUT Select this to verify that the displayed module and channel are correct.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Calibrate Motor
ATTENTION
You should not access the Hybrid Control Utilities Calibrate Controller PPO Block display on
the PC while the OI calibration display is being displayed, or vice versa. Calibration can't be
performed as long as both displays are shown; you must exit either the PC or the OI display to
perform a motor calibration.
Introduction
The Calibrate/Setup Motor menu on the Unit Setup display lets you set up and calibrate a selected motor.
SETUP lets you set the motors deadband, travel time, low output limit, and high output limit.
CALIBRATE ensures that the 0% and 100% motor positions are actually correct and measures the true
motor speed.
The calibration of a motor is similar to that of an AI or AO. However, the motor calibration values are
stored as part of the PPO blocks configuration data, not on the AI card itself. Therefore, to retain these
motor calibration values, you must upload the configuration and save it to disk after motor calibration has
been performed.
The basic motor calibration procedure is as follows:
move the motor to its 0% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.
capture the 0% feedback value.
move the motor to its 100% position and wait until the feedback signal has stabilized.
capture the 100% feedback value.
measure the true motor speed by:
a) moving the motor for a fixed period of time.
b) measuring the position feedback delta.
c) computing a motor speed from this data.
This value will override any previously configured value.
save the calibration values as part of the PPO blocks configuration data.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Motor Setup
The Motor Setup display lets you set the motors Deadband, Travel Time, Low Output Limit, and High
Output Limit.
Table 119 Motor Setup Procedure
Step Action
1 Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR.
The SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE screen will appear.
2 Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select SETUP
from the menu.
The SETUP MOTOR screen will appear.
3 Select DEADBAND.
Deadband is an adjustable gap between forward and reverse motor operation (the range over
which the output can change before a relay is energized).
Press the ENTER key.
Enter a value of from 0.5 to 5.0%
4 Select TRAVEL TIME.

Travel time is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to its calibrated
100% position.
Enter a value of from 12 to 300 seconds.
5 Select OUTPUT LOW LIMIT.

This is the low limit for the motor position.
Enter a value of from 0% to 100%
6 Select OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT.

This is the high limit for the motor position.
Enter a value of from 0% to 100%
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Motor Calibration
The Calibrate Motor displays let you calibrate a motor s 0% and 100% positions.
Table 120 Motor Calibration Entry Procedure
Step Action
1 Press the MENU key, select UNIT SETUP then CALIBRATE/SETUP MOTOR.
The SELECT MOTOR TO CALIBRATE screen will appear.
2 Select a motor from the list of motors on the display and press the ENTER key. Select
CALIBRATE from the menu.
The CALIBRATE MOTOR screen will appear.
3 The controller must be in Program Mode in order to perform calibration.

If it is not in Program Mode, select SET CONTROLLER MODE from the menu.
Scroll down to PROGRAM then press the ENTER key.
4 Select a calibration method.

There are three methods for calibrating the motor. Scroll to the desired method and press the
ENTER key. Follow the appropriate procedure listed under Calibration Procedures.
AUTO the controller positions the motor and captures the positions.
SEMI-AUTO the controller positions the motor and the user captures the positions.
HAND the user positions the motor by hand and captures the positions.
Calibration Status Information

This area at the top of the three CALIBRATE MOTOR displays shows the following information during
calibration:
STATUS this field indicates the current status of the calibration procedure.
NOTE: If a status of Calibration Failed is displayed, take the appropriate corrective action,
and then repeat the calibration procedure again, beginning at Step 1. See Calibration Errors
for more information.
FEEDBACK VALUE this field shows the motor feedback value [a value between 0.0 and 1.0]. This
value should change whenever the motor is actually moving.
PERCENT COMPLETE this field indicates the progress of the current calibration step in percent [0 to
100%].
Cancel Calibration
You can stop the calibration process at any time by pressing the F1 key. The motor will stop moving when
this key is pressed. In order to resume calibration you must begin again at Step 1.
Calibration Errors
The following errors may be reported during the calibration process. Please take the appropriate corrective
action and repeat the calibration procedure beginning at Step 1.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Table 121 Calibration Errors
STATUS CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Calibration Failed The calibration was not Go back to Step 1 and repeat
performed in the correct the calibration process
sequence.
The selected motor position has Go back to the SELECT

not been configured. MOTOR TO CALIBRATE
display and reselect the desired
motor.
Calibration Failed Bad AI The AI channel being used for Check for correct wiring and
the position feedback signal has correct AI input type.
failed in some way.
Calibration Failed Bad Feedback The value of the feedback signal Check for reversed wiring of
is out of range for the calibration the feedback signal. Forward
being performed. motor movement should
produce increasing feedback
values.
Calibration Failed Wrong AI The firmware on the AI module Obtain a new AI module from
Version does not support PPO motor your supplier.
control using a slidewire for the
position feedback.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Auto Calibration Procedure

Table 122 Auto Calibration Procedure
Step Action
1 Select AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR screen.
Status - READY
2 Select START AUTO CALIBRATION
Status this field will change as the controller automatically performs the various steps of the
motor calibration process described in Step 3 below.
Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
Percent Complete indicates the progress of each step [0 to 100%]
3 RESULT:
Status WAITMOTOR MOVING TO 0% POSITION.

Feedback Value indicates movement and direction of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]. This value
should decrease until the 0% position is reached.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%]
Status WAITCALCULATING 0% FEEDBACK VALUE.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor.

should increase until the 100% position is reached.

Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor.
Status WAITCALCULATING MOTOR SPEED.

Status WAITSAVING CALIBRATION VALUES.
Percent Complete indicates the progress of this step [0 to 100%].
Status CALIBRATION COMPLETED.
4 Press the ESC key to exit this display.
A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.
Press the F2 key to position the motor at 0%
Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure
ATTENTION
The steps of the Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described
below. You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.
If the message ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER appears in the Status Area at the
top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been
performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had
completed.
You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration)
and beginning again at Step 1.
Table 123 Semi-Auto Calibration Procedure
Step Action
1 Select SEMI-AUTO CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR
screen.
Status - READY
2 Select START 0% CALIBRATION
should decrease until the 0% position is reached.
Status MOTOR IS AT 0% POSITION
3 Select CALIBRATE 0% POSITION
Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0].
Status 0% FEEDBACK VALUE CAPTURED
4 Select START 100% CALIBRATION.
should increase until the 100% position is reached.
Status MOTOR IS AT 100% POSITION
Feedback Value indicates the current position of the motor [0.0 to 1.0]
6 Select START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION. A warning display will appear:
WARNING
MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION
WILL MOVE THE MOTOR BETWEEN
THE 0% AND 100% CALIBRATION POINTS
PRESS ENTER TO START
PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Step Action
7 Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.

Status MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE
8 Select SAVE CALIBRATION. The following information will appear:
FEEDBACK AT 0% - a value corresponding to the motors 0% position [0.0 to 1.0]

MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor
Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to
its calibrated 100% position.
9 Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.

Status CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED
A message box with three choices will appear. Select one.

Press the F4 key to leave the motor at its current position.
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Hand Calibration Procedure
ATTENTION
The steps of the Hand Calibration Procedure must be performed in the order described below.
You must wait for each step to complete before selecting and activating the next step.
If the message ERROR: PERFORM STEPS IN ORDER appears in the Status Area at the
top of the display, it means that either the steps of the calibration procedure have been
performed out of sequence, or you tried to activate the next step before the current step had
completed.
You can restart the procedure at any time by pressing the F1 key (to cancel the calibration)
and beginning again at Step 1.
Table 124 Hand Calibration Procedure
Step Action
1 Select HAND CALIBRATE MOTOR from the menu on the CALIBRATE MOTOR screen.
Status - READY
2 Select START 0% CALIBRATION
Status PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 0% POSITION.
should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the
motor is moved in the reverse direction.
Percent Complete will remain at 0% during this step.
Move the motor by hand to the 0% position. When complete, go to step 3.
4 Select START 100% CALIBRATION.
Status PLEASE MOVE MOTOR TO 100% POSITION.
should increase when the motor is moved in the forward direction, and decrease when the
motor is moved in the reverse direction.
Percent Complete will remain at 0% during this step.
Move the motor by hand to the 100% position. When complete, go to step 5.
6 Select START MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION. A warning will appear:
WARNING
MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION
WILL MOVE THE MOTOR BETWEEN
THE 0% AND 100% CALIBRATION POINTS
PRESS ENTER TO START
PRESS ESC TO CLOSE POPUP
9/03
Unit Setup
Calibrate Motor
Step Action
7 Press the ENTER key to start the Motor Speed Calibration.
Status MOTOR SPEED CALIBRATION COMPLETE
8 Select SAVE CALIBRATION. The following information will appear:

MOTOR SPEED (IN SECONDS). This is the motor speed that was detected during Motor
Speed Calibration. This is the time it takes the motor to travel from its calibrated 0% position to
its calibrated 100% position.
9 Press the ENTER key to Save Calibration.
Status CALIBRATION VALUES SAVED
9/03
Unit Setup
Display brightness
Display brightness
This display allows you to change the brightness on the display.
Press on the OI to increase the brightness
Press on the OI to decrease the brightness.
CHANGE DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
Press to increase brightness

Press to decrease brightness
Press ESC to exit
PROG
Figure 60 Brightness display
9/03
Unit Setup
Display brightness
9/03
Disk Utilities
Overview
Access
Main menu.
Description
Disk Utilities lets you load files from the disk to the controller, or store files from the controller to the disk.
Disk insertion
Step Action
1 Open door and insert the disk. While the door is open BEZEL OPEN is displayed.
2 Close door. CHECKING DISK is displayed while the disk is checked for proper formatting and
ready for use. When the message goes away, the disk is ready for use.
Load
Load copies a file from the disk to the controller.
Store
Store copies a file from the controller to the disk.
See also
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message descriptions.
9/03
Disk Utilities
List disk files
List disk files

This display lists all files on the disk.
Table 125 List disk files details
Feature Description
FILENAME.EXT File types are identified by the following extensions.
.CDE Configuration
.PRF SP Profile
.SCH SP Schedule
.SEQ Sequence
.RCP Recipe
.DSS Data Storage Set
Anatomy of filenames
This applies only to files created on the OI.
XXXXXX01.CDE
Prefix Suffix Extension
6 characters 00-99 Automatically assigned
according to file type
TIP
1. Use Increment and Decrement to see more files.
2. If no files are on the disk, NO FILES is displayed.
3. All files on the disk are shown.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load/store SP profiles
This function lets you
load profiles from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or
store profiles from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.
Description
Once a profile is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Profile from Disk, it can be loaded from
memory into a Setpoint Program where it can be run. Therefore, to run a profile that is on the disk, you
must first Load Profile From Disk to memory, then load the profile from memory to the Setpoint
Programmer. To do the latter, see (page 62).
Conversely, to store to disk a program being run by the Setpoint Programmer, you must save the program
from the Setpoint Program to memory, (See Save Program, Page 54) then Store Profile To Disk.
Profile on disk or Zip Program in Setpoint Programmer

Profiles in RAM
Store Profile To Disk Profile #1 LABEL678

Save Program F1
STATE PROF SEG RAMP
Profile #2 RUN
RUN # 1 # 1
F2
Profile #3 PRIMARY AUXLABEL HOLD
ENGU ENGU
.
PV 1450.0 31.0 F3
. SP 1449.0 31.1 RESET
.
Load Profile From Disk Load Program SEG TIME REM 01:30:00 F4
LOAD
MORE COMMANDS
Figure 61 Relationship between disk, profile memory, and setpoint programmer
Select one of the profiles from the Load/Store Profiles display. This is the profile memory location you will
load to or store from.
Next, you will either:
load a profile from the disk to the selected slot in Controller memory, or
store the profile from this profile location to the disk.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Table 126 Load/store profiles details
Feature Description
LOAD Select this to load the selected disk profile to the selected slot in Controller memory. Once in
PROFILE memory, the profile can be loaded into a setpoint programmer where it can be run.
FROM
DISK After selecting LOAD PROFILE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD PROFILE 1 FROM DISK
BATCH 01 PRF
BATCH 02 PRF
PROFIL01 PRF
PROFIL02 PRF
PROFIL03 PRF
Select the desired profile to load from disk and press Enter to load it to the selected Controller
memory profile location. The message NO FILES means no profiles are on the disk.
STORE Select this to store the selected profile from Controller memory to the disk.
PROFILE
TO DISK After selecting STORE PROFILE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE PROFILE 1 TO DISK
FILE PROFIL01 PRF

FILES ON DISK:
BATCH 01 PRF
BATCH 02 PRF
PROFIL01 PRF
PROFIL02 PRF
PROFIL03 PRF
At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the profile being stored. Use
Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press Enter to store.
See also
See Load Program (page 62), Save Program (Page 54)
While performing Disk Utilities, messages may appear. See Table 164 for message descriptions.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load/store SP schedules
load schedules from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or
store schedules from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.
Description
Once a schedule is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Schedule from Disk, it can be loaded
from memory into the Setpoint Scheduler where it can be run. Therefore, to run a schedule that is on the
disk, you must first Load Schedule From Disk to memory, then load the schedule from memory to the
Setpoint Scheduler. To do the latter, see Load Schedule on Page 84).
Conversely, to store to disk a schedule being run by the Setpoint Scheduler, you must save the schedule
from the Setpoint Schedule to memory, then Store Schedule To Disk. To do the former, see Save schedule
Page 74).
Schedule on disk or Zip Schedule in Scheduler

Schedules in RAM
SP SCHEDULER SPTAG1 MAY 05
11:30
Store Schedule To Disk Schedule #1 RUN 3 2 0

Save Schedule F1
SEG REMAIN 0000:00:00 TOTAL 0000:00:00 RUN
Schedule #2 SP PV
F2
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU
SP1 USERLBL1 123456.7 123456.7 ENGU HOLD
Schedule #3 SP1
SP1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
ENGU
ENGU
. SP1
SP1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
ENGU
ENGU
F3
RESET
. SP1
SP1
USERLBL1
USERLBL1
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
123456.7
ENGU
ENGU
F4
. LOAD
ADV
Load Schedule From Disk Load Schedule
CLEAR
EDIT
SAVE
Figure 62 Relationship between disk, schedule memory, and scheduler
9/03
Disk Utilities
Table 127 Load/store schedules details
Feature Description
LOAD Select this to load the selected schedule to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
SCHEDULE memory, the schedule can be loaded into a configuration.
FROM DISK
After selecting LOAD SCHEDULE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD SCHEDULE 1 FROM DISK
BATCH 01 SCH
BATCH 02 SCH
PROFIL01 SCH
PROFIL02 SCH
PROFIL03 SCH
Select the desired schedule to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller
memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no
schedules are on the disk.
STORE Select this to store the selected schedule from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
SCHEDULE TO
DISK After selecting STORE SCHEDULE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE SCHEDULE 1 TO DISK
FILE UNIT 01 SCH

FILES ON DISK:
BATCH 01 SCH
BATCH 02 SCH
PROFIL01 SCH
PROFIL02 SCH
PROFIL03 SCH
At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the schedule being stored. Use
increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
status of the store is shown on the display.
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load/Store sequences
load sequences from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or
store sequences from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.
Once a sequence is loaded into the Controllers memory with Load Sequence from Disk, it can be loaded
from memory into the Sequencer where it can be run. Therefore, to run a sequence that is on the disk, you
must first Load Sequence From Disk to memory, then load the sequence from memory to the Sequencer.
To do the latter, see Load Sequence (Page 102) in Sequence operation.
Conversely, to store to disk a sequence being rum by the sequencer, you must save the sequence from the
sequence from the Sequencer to memory, then store Sequence to disk. To do the fromer, See Save
Sequence (page 97 ) in Sequencer Operation.
Sequence on disk or Zip Sequence in Sequencer

Sequences in RAM
SEQUENCER 12:30
SEQUENCE 20 COGS
Store Sequence To Disk Sequence #1
Save Sequence
STATE HEATING F1
Sequence #2 RUN
STEP 1 MODE RUN
Sequence #3 STEP
ELAPSED TIME
STEP
TIME REMAINING
SEQUENCE
ELAPSED TIME
F2
HOLD
. 0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0 0000:00:00.0
. AUX OUTPUT - 124.6

F3
. F4 ADVANCES TO STEP 60 STATE 4 RESET
Load Sequence From Disk Load Sequence VIEW/EDIT SEQUENCE
LOAD SEQUENCE
EDIT STEPS F4
SAVE SEQUENCE ADV
CLEAR SEQUENCE
Figure 63 Relationship between disk, sequence memory, and sequencer
Table 128 Load/store sequence details
Feature Description
LOAD Select this to load the selected sequence to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
SEQUENCE memory, the sequence can be loaded into a configuration.
FROM DISK
After selecting LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD SEQUENCE1 FROM DISK
BATCH01 SEQ
BATCH02 SEQ
BATCH03 SEQ
BATCH04 SEQ
BATCH05 SEQ
BATCH06 SEQ
BATCH07 SEQ
BATCH08 SEQ
BATCH09 SEQ
BATCH10 SEQ
Select the desired sequence to load from disk and press "Enter" to load it to Controller
memory. The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no
sequences are on the disk.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Feature Description
STORE Select this to store the selected sequence from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
SEQUENCE TO
DISK After selecting STORE SEQUENCE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE SEQUENCE1 TO DISK
FILE BATCH01 SEQ

FILES ON DISK: BATCH02 SEQ
BATCH03 SEQ
BATCH04 SEQ
BATCH05 SEQ
BATCH06 SEQ
BATCH07 SEQ
BATCH08 SEQ
BATCH09 SEQ
BATCH10 SEQ
At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the sequence being stored. Use
increment/decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load/store recipes
Load/store recipes
load recipes from the disk to the Controllers RAM memory, or
store recipes from the Controllers RAM memory to the disk.
Description
A recipe is a collection of variables and their values or states. When you load a recipe into controller
memory, the recipe becomes available to be loaded into the configuration. By subsequently loading a recipe
from controller memory into a configuration, the values or states of the variables in the recipe replace the
values of those variables in the controllers configuration.
Select a recipe from the Recipes In Memory display. As explained next in Table 129, you will either
load a recipe from the disk to the selected recipe location in Controller memory, or
store the recipe from this recipe location to the disk.
TIP
Do not confuse LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK (into memory) with LOAD RECIPE (into the
controllers configuration). See Load recipe (page 47).
Table 129 Load/store recipes details
Feature Description
LOAD RECIPE Select this to load the selected recipe to one of the slots in Controller memory. Once in
FROM DISK memory, the recipe can be loaded into a configuration.
After selecting LOAD RECIPE FROM DISK, the following display appears.
LOAD RECIPE 1 FROM DISK
PRDUCT01 RCP
PRDUCT02 RCP
PRDUCT03 RCP
PRDUCT04 RCP
PRDUCT05 RCP
Select the desired recipe to load from disk and press Enter to load it to Controller memory.
The status of the load is shown on the display. The message NO FILES means no recipes
are on the disk.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load/store recipes
Feature Description
STORE RECIPE Select this to store the selected recipe from Controller RAM memory to the disk.
TO DISK
After selecting STORE RECIPE TO DISK, the following display appears.
STORE RECIPE 1 TO DISK
FILE PRDUCT 01RCP

FILES ON DISK:
PRDUCT01 RCP
PRDUCT02 RCP
PRDUCT03 RCP
PRDUCT04 RCP
PRDUCT05 RCP
At the FILE prompt, select a filename and number for the recipe being stored. Use
Increment/Decrement to see available file names and numbers. Press "Enter" to store. The
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load configuration
Load configuration
Lets you load a configuration file (.CDE) from the disk to the Controller.
TIP
Controller must be in one of these modes: RUN UNLOCK, PROGRAM, or PROGRAM

LOCKED.
Use Increment and Decrement keys to see more files on the disk.
NO FILES message means no configuration files; there may be other file types on the disk.
Loop Tuning constants are wiped out by a configuration download. The loop tuning constants are
considered part of the configuration and are overwritten by the loop tuning constants in the newly
downloaded configuration.
Table 130 Load configuration procedure
Step Action
1 At the following display, select the controller mode:
DISPLAY CONTROLLER MODE IS (CURRENT MODE).

LOADING CONFIGURATION TO CONTROLLER IN PROGRAM UNLOCKED MODE IS
ALLOWED.
SELECT F# KEY TO CHANGE MODE.

F1 RUN
F2 PROGRAM
PRESS ESC TO ABORT

PRESS ENTER TO LOAD
If you want to change the mode of the controller before loading a configuration, press either F1
or F2 keys. To proceed with the load, press Enter.
2 Select a .CDE file from the list of files shown.
3 Wait for the file to be loaded to the controllers configuration buffer.
The display will show the percent complete status. This runs in the background and does not
affect your process.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load configuration
Step Action
4 Apply or discard the loaded configuration:
If the load is successful you are presented with 4 choices.
F1 Hot start holds all outputs, then runs the new configuration.
F2 Cold start de-energizes all outputs, then runs the new configuration.
Hot Start or Cold Start affects the process outputs, which could create a
hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury or
property damage. Be sure you understand the effects of Hot Start or Cold
Start BEFORE selecting them; it is up to you to determine the suitability of
the configuration in the application and the potential dangers of a Hot or
Cold Start.
If you are unsure how Hot Start or Cold Start will affect your process, select
Abort.
The 4 choices are:
F1 HOT START: USE THE CONFIGURATION I JUST DOWNLOADED. DO NOT

REINITIALIZE THE CONTROLLER MEMORY. OUTPUTS WILL BE HELD DURING
RESTART. STAY IN RUN MODE.
F2 COLD START: USE THE CONFIGURATION I JUST DOWNLOADED. REINITIALIZE

THE CONTROLLER MEMORY. OUTPUTS WILL BE DE-ENERGIZED DURING RESTART.
RETURN TO RUN MODE.
F3 STAY IN PROGRAM MODE
F4 ABORT: DO NOT USE THE CONFIGURATION I JUST DOWNLOADED. I WANT TO

CONTINUE AS IF I DID NOT PERFORM THIS NEW DOWNLOAD. STAY IN RUN MODE.
The controller has already evaluated the configuration that you just downloaded and
determined which of these 4 options is permitted. Permitted options will have a yellow
background, illegal options will have a gray background.
Choose one of the permitted options with the F1-F4 keys. HOT START or COLD START
causes OI to reset itself (after several seconds) and the Start Display will be shown for
approximately one minute. When the reset has completed the first operating display will
appear.
Note: During the time period required to perform the Hot Start, the controller will suspend the
execution of its function blocks and hold its outputs at their current value. If you select Hot
Start and the Hot Start will take longer than approximately three controller scan cycles, the OI
will display the following information:
CONFIRM HOT START

HOT START DURATION: xx SECS
THIS IS THE TIME NEEDED TO PERFORMTHE HOT START. DURING THIS TIME THE
OUTPUTS WILL BE HELD.
PRESS ENTER TO HOT STARTPRESS ESC TO ABORT
The HOT START DURATION is the amount of time (in seconds) that will be required to
perform the Hot Start. If this time period is acceptable, press Enter to begin the Hot Start. If
this time period is not acceptable, press Escape and make another selection.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Load configuration
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Store configuration
Store configuration
Lets you store the controllers configuration to the disk.
Table 131 Store configuration details
Feature Description
FILE Select a name and number for the configuration. Press Enter to store it to disk. The
FILES ON DISK Lists the existing files on the disk. Configurations have .CDE extension. Use Increment
and Decrement keys to see more files on the disk.
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Format disk
Format disk
This DOS-formats a floppy disk for storage of recipes, profiles, or configurations. Not available for Zip
disks.
Table 132 Format disk details
Feature Description
FORMAT DISK Select this to format the disk. A warning message will be displayed. Escape to abort
the format or press Enter to begin.
All disk data will be erased. The message FORMATTING DISK will appear until
formatting is complete, then FORMAT COMPLETE is displayed. Press any key to
cancel formatting.
See also
9/03
Disk Utilities
Set Controller Mode
Set Controller Mode

This lets you change the Controllers operating mode. The current mode is indicated on the bottom right of
the display.
Table 133 Set mode details
Feature Description
CONTROLLER MODE Current mode of the controller. See Table 90.
SET CONTROLLER RUN: Select this to resume running the process.

MODE
OFFLINE: Select this before performing AI calibration.
PROGRAM: Select this:
Before performing AI and AO Calibration.
To turn off all of the controller outputs while reconfiguring a control strategy.
Exiting the Program mode causes a cold start that refreshes the Flash memory of the
controller so that if your battery goes dead the data in Flash is up to date. Use the
Program mode for changes whenever possible.
Table 134 Controller modes defined
Mode Function Blocks Executed? Output Status? Effect upon return to RUN mode?
RUN Yes Outputs updated None
OFFLINE No Outputs held Resume
PROGRAM No Outputs off Cold start
ATTENTION
You can not change the controller mode from this display if the controllers mode switch is in
the RUN LOCKED or PROGRAM LOCKED position. If the switch is in either of these locked
positions, this display will show the message MODE MUST NOT BE LOCKED OR FAULT.
TIP
If the controller switch is set to RUN but the mode was set to PROGRAM or OFFLINE here,
following a power cycle the mode will return to RUN.
Changing from Program to Run causes data in RAM (setpoint profiles, recipes, schedules,
sequences) to be copied to non-volatile (FLASH) memory.
In a cold start, all data storage and display buffers are cleared and accumulated values of
some function blocks (such as totalizers) are reset.
In a resume, all buffered data and values are retained and the process resumes where it left
off.
9/03
Disk Utilities
Set Controller Mode
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Data Storage lets you store data from the controller on a floppy disk (Models 559 and 1042) or ZIP disk
(model 1042 only). Trends, a point log, alarms, and events are collected in separate files on a disk for later
analysis and review on a PC with SDA data analysis software.
Data storage overall process
PC with: Step 1: Configure data storage

1. Hybrid Control Designer Configure Data Storage Sets (.DSS) using
2. SDA for analyzing Hybrid Control Designer.
stored data
Controller
Step 2: Transfer configuration from PC to Controller

Transfer Data Storage Sets to Controller by
Step 3: Initialize and begin storage one of the following methods:
1. Pre-initialize optional ZIP disk on a PC with 1. Download configuration (which includes .DSS)
Hybrid Control Designer. from Hybrid Control Designer to Controller.
2. Initialize Zip disk or floppy disk in the OI. 2. a) Save .DSS file to floppy disk
3. Process data (trends, point log, alarms, events) is stored to b) Insert .DSS disk in Operator Interface
floppy disk according to Storage Control settings. c) Load Data Storage Settings from .DSS disk to the Controller.
Step 4: Analyze stored data

1. Remove floppy disk with stored process data.
Honeywell
2. View stored data on PC with Software Data Analysis (SDA) F1 7 8 9
software. 4
1
5
2
6
3
Operator
F2
0 _
? ALARM Interface
(Model 1042
F3
Step 5 (optional): Transfer configuration to another Controller F4

ESC
example)
To transfer Data Storage Settings from one Controller to another:
1. Store .DSS settings to OI floppy disk.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2. Insert this floppy disk into second Controllers OI.

3. Load Data Storage Settings to the second Controller.
Note that configuration and analysis are done on a PC and operation is done through the OI.
What can be stored

You can store the following data types:
2 trend groups of up to 12 points each.
Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) alarm state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes
of all points in all alarm groups are stored.
Up to 1500 (maximum is user configurable) event state changes (on-to-off or off-to-on). State changes of
all points designated as events are stored. An event is any digital signal added to the event group. These
can include setpoint profile events and setpoint schedule events as well as any other digital signals added
to the event group.
A Point Log of up to 2000-5000 records (maximum is user configurable) where each record contains
sampled values or states of up to 12 points.
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
What can not be stored

Setpoint Programs, instrument configurations, recipes, variables, diagnostics, and calibrations are not part
of the Data Storage feature.
Storage capacity [floppy and Zip(1042 only)]

When you are trying to calculate the trend file storage capacity, you must also consider the Point Log file.
The Point Log should be set up so that it will last as long as the trend files; otherwise it may cause a Disk
Full condition long before the trend files are full. Use the following formula to determine the duration of
the Point Log file.
Duration = Record Count x Storage Rate
For example, if the Point Log is configured to hold 2000 records and the storage rate is 1 minute, the Point
Log will become full in 2000 minutes (33 hours).
If the duration of the Point Log does not match the duration of the trend files, adjust the record count and/or
storage of the Point Log as needed.
Storage capacity (floppy disk)

Floppy disk storage capacities for all data types except trends are shown above. Capacity for trends is
inversely proportional to the number of trend points and the storage time interval (that is, the time between
trend samples). That is, the shorter the storage interval and the more points being stored, the sooner the disk
will reach capacity. For example, when storing 2 trend groups of 12 points each at a storage interval of 2
seconds, the floppy disk will be filled in a few hours. Conversely, when storing 1 trend group of 3 points at
a storage interval of 30 minutes, the floppy disk could take several months to be filled.
Calculating storage capacity (floppy disk)

Use the following formula to calculate the disk capacity in hours:
Disk Factor * R1
Disk Capacity (hours ) =
F1 + ( F 2 * ( R1 / R 2)
where
Disk Factor is based on which data types are stored:
398: Trend storage only
394: Trends, Alarms & Events
347: Trends, Alarms & Events, Point Log
R1 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 1
R2 = storage rate (in seconds) for Trend 2
F1= point factor for Trend 1. See Table 135.
F2= point factor for Trend 2. See Table 135.
Table 135 Data storage point factors
For this number of points in a trend:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Use this Point Factor:
0 14.00 20.16 26.53 33.60 38.77 45.82 50.40 56.00 63.00 72.00 84.00 84.00
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Example storage capacity calculation (floppy disk)

Trend 1 = 6 points, rate 30 seconds
Trend 2 = none
Point Log = OFF
Alarms and Events = ON
Calculation:
Disk factor = 394
Point Factor (Trend 1) = 45.82
Point Factor (Trend 2) = 33.60
394 * 30
Disk capacity (hours) = = 258 hours
45.82 + (0 * (30/0))
Zip drives (On Model 1042 only)

Preinitialize Zip disks on a PC using DSU
If the OI has the optional Zip drive installed, we strongly recommend that you pre-initialize the Zip disks
on a PC using the Data Storage Utility (DSU) - See Table 136. This program is part of the Hybrid Control
Designer package. If you do not pre-initialize your data storage Zip disks using DSU, the initialization
process on the OI may take several hours.
Note that DSU cannot be used for floppy disks.
Capacity of a Zip disk
The following formula can be used to compute the capacity of any trend file on a Zip disk:
6560 * R
Capacity (in hours) =
F
where:
R is the storage rate of the trend, in seconds.
F is the point factor for the trend. See Table 88.
Note that each trend file on a Zip disk is 24MB, so the capacity of each trend file is independent of any
other data storage files on the disk.
Estimated Sample Rates Estimated Zip Drive Capacity Per Trend File
Zip drive
capacity Number of Total Number 2 Sec. 10 Sec. 30 Sec. 2 Min. 5 Min.
Trends of Points
1 or 2 6 11.9 days 59.5 days 178 days 714 days 1785 days
12 6.5 days 32.5 days 97 days 388 days 970 days
Note: On a Zip drive each trend is allocated 24 megabytes
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Table 136 Preinitializing ZIP Disk - Model 1042 only
Step Action
1 Insert the 100MB/Zip disk into your PC drive.
2 Start the Hybrid Control Designer Program under Windows
3 Select the Utilities tab, then select Data Storage Utility. The dialog box appears.
4 Click on Drive Letter to specify the drive on your PC (A, B, etc.).
5 Click on Trend Groups to specify the number of Trend Groups that the OI will need
(1 or 2)
6 Click on Pre-Initialize to prepare the disk for storage. Each trend group takes about four minutes.
7 Exit DSU.
8 Remove disk, insert it into the OI, and initialize it. See Initializing Disk under this section entitled
"Data Storage Operation".
Rollover
If a data type is configured for rollover storage, the space allocated for it will fill up then the oldest data
will be replaced with new incoming data (as a circular buffer). For example, if alarm storage is set to
rollover and the alarm file is set up to store 1500 alarms, 1500 alarms will be stored. The 1501st alarm will
replace the oldest alarm, the 1502nd alarm will replace the next oldest alarm, and so on.
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Storage modes
Trends, Point Logs, and Alarms/Events can be stored in Continuous or Batch modes. In addition, Point
Logs can be stored in On Command mode. See Table 137.
Table 137 Storage modes
Mode Description
Continuous Data is sampled at the storage interval.
Batch Data is sampled at the storage interval, but also a Batch Enable Signal separates the sampled
data into numbered batches. Batch #1 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends
when the signal turns off. Batch #2 begins when the Batch Enable Signal turns on, and ends
when the signal turns off, etc. No batch mode data is collected while the Batch Enable Signal is
off. The Batch Enable Signal does not affect data being stored as Continuous or On Command.
On Command Point Log mode only. Point Log data is sampled once when the Point Log storage is enabled,
but not after each storage interval. That is, a snapshot of Point Log data is stored once. This
snapshot is triggered by the off-to-on transition of the Enable Signal for Point Log.
Off No data is being stored.
Storage intervals
When data storage is enabled, samples are taken at regular intervals known as the storage intervals. These
intervals can be from a few seconds to 30 minutes for trends, or more for Point Log. Each data type has its
own storage interval.
In Continuous and Batch modes, the storage interval determines how often data is sampled and stored. In
these modes for trends and alarms/events, data is first sampled when storage is enabled and again at equally
spaced intervals thereafter. For example, if trend storage is enabled at 2:03 p.m. and the interval is 10
minutes, trend storage occurs at 2:03, 2:13, 2:23, etc. until storage is disabled.
In Continuous and Batch modes for Point Log, data is first sampled after storage is enabled but not until the
programmed Start Time. Data is sampled at equally spaced intervals after the Start Time. For example,
suppose the Start Time is 3:00 p.m. and the storage interval is 10 minutes. If storage is enabled at 2:03
p.m., the first sample will occur at 3:00 and every 10 minutes thereafter. If storage is disabled at 3:35 and
enabled at 3:42, storage will resume at 3:50. Notice that the interval is synchronized to the Start Time.
The storage interval for Point Log can also be once a day or once a month, synchronized to the Start Time.
In On Command mode for Point Log, there is no storage interval or Start Time. A single sample of Point
Log data is taken when the Point Log Enable changes from off (disable) to on (enable).
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
How storage is controlled

Depending on the data type being stored, there are two or three levels of control for data storage. For
storage of a data type to occur, all levels of control must be enabled. If any level is disabled, that data type
will not be stored. Figure 64 shows the controls that must be enabled for each storage mode and data type.
The left side shows the three data types and their possible storage modes (only one storage mode is in effect
for any data type). For example, trend storage is either batch or continuous, not both. The arrows show the
conditions required for that storage to take place. For example, trend batch storage requires three controls
to be enabled: 1) the Trend Storage Control, 2) the Batch Command Control, and 3) the Data Storage
Control. Notice that the Batch Command Control applies only to those data types in batch storage mode.
Also notice Data Storage Control enables all storage; if it is disabled no storage will occur.
Trends
Storage Mode = Batch
S
T
Trends
Storage Mode = Continuous
O
Trend Storage = Enable
(with digital signal or R
Storage Control menu)
A
Point Log G
Storage Mode = Batch
E
Point Log
Storage Mode = Continuous
I
Point Log N
Storage Mode = On Command
Point Log Storage =
Enable
(with digital signal or
E
F
Alarms/Events
Storage Mode = Batch F
E
Alarms/Events
Storage Mode = Continuous C
Alarms/Events Storage =
Enable
Data Storage = Enable
T
(with digital signal or Batch Command =
Enable (with Storage Control menu)
(with digital signal or
Figure 64 Required enabled controls for storage
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Three levels of control
Data storage enabler

The highest level of control is the Data Storage control item found on the Storage Control menu under Data
Storage (first line in Figure 65). It disables data storage for all trends, alarms, events, and point log. It must
be enabled for any storage to occur.
STORAGE CONTROLS
DATA STORAGE ENABLE
BATCH COMMAND START
TRENDS ENABLE
POINT LOG ENABLE
ALARMS/EVENTS ENABLE
Figure 65 Storage control menu with all enablers shown
Data type enabler

The second level of control is the Data Type Enabler. Each data type (trends, point log, and alarms/events)
has its own Enabler that turns storage on and off for that data type. Each of these Enablers can either appear
on the Storage Control menu (third, fourth, and fifth lines in Figure 65) or can be programmed as a digital
signal. For example, if the Trend Enabler is programmed as a digital signal, it will not appear on the
Storage Control menu. In this case, trend storage is enabled when the digital signal turns on and is disabled
when the signal turns off.
The Point Log Enabler functions differently depending on the storage mode. In Continuous and Batch
modes, it enables Point Log storage to begin at the Start Time and at every storage interval thereafter. In On
Command mode, when it changes from off (disable) to on (enable), it causes a single sample of Point Log
data to be stored at that moment (Figure 68).
Batch enabler
The third level of control is the Batch Enabler. It starts and stops storage for all data types configured for
Batch storage; it does not affect Continuous or On Command storage. It appears either on the Data Storage
Control menuas Batch Command (second line of Figure 65)or it is programmed as a digital signal.
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Example of trend enabling

In Figure 66, notice that no continuous trend storage occurs unless Trend Enable and Data Storage Enable
are both on (enabled). For batch trend storage, notice that all three enables must be on.
Batch
Command
If enabled Trend
like this: Enable
Data Storage
Enable
Trend
Continuous
Then stored
Batch #1 Batch #2 Batch #3
like this:
Trend
Batch
Key:
Time
Disabled Enabled Disabled
Figure 66 Trend storage: enable conditions
Example of alarm/event enabling

As with Trends, no continuous alarm/event storage occurs unless Alarm/Event Enable and Data Storage
Enable are both on (enabled). For batch alarm/event storage, all three enables must be on.
Batch
Command
If enabled Alarm/Event
like this: Enable
Data Storage
Enable
Alarm/Event
Continuous
Then stored
like this:
Alarm/Event
Batch
Key:
Time
Disabled Enabled Disabled
Figure 67 Alarm/event storage: enable conditions
9/03
Data Storage
Overview
Example of point log enabling

In Figure 68, notice that no continuous Point Log storage occurs unless Point Log Enable and Data Storage
Enable are both on (enabled). For batch Point Log storage, notice that all three enables must be on. Notice
that storage does not actually occur until the Start Time occurs, and then at every Storage Interval
thereafter.
For On Command storage, notice the samples are taken the instant Point Log Enable is enabled but not at
intervals.
Batch
Command
If enabled Point Log

like this: Enable
Data Storage
Enable
Point Log
Storage starts
Continuous
here
Then stored Point Log Storage starts

like this: Batch here
Point Log
Single samples
On Command
12:00 12:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 3:00 3:30 4:00 4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30 7:00
Time
Key: Start
Time
Disabled Enabled Disabled Start Time = 1:15 p.m.
Storage Interval = 30 minutes
Figure 68 Point log storage: enable conditions
How to analyze stored data

With the stored data on a floppy or Zip disk, use SDA on a PC to review the data graphically or in tabular
form. Refer to SDA documentation for details.
9/03
Data Storage
Data Storage Operation

Access
DATA STORAGE
MAIN MENU MAY06
11:30
VIEW STORAGE STATUS
STORAGE CONTROLS
RECIPES INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK
VARIABLES LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS
SP PROGRAMMERS VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS
LOOPS START NEW STORAGE SETTINGS
ALARMS/DIAGS STORE STORAGE SETTINGS
UNIT SETUP

DISK UTILITIES
DATA STORAGE
Typical data storage tasks
Task Page
Viewing storage status. 229
Controlling storage (3 methods): 231
Start/stop all storage with DATA STORAGE item on Storage Control

menu.
Start/stop a particular storage files storage (2 ways):
with its external enable discrete, or
with its enabler on the Storage Control menu.
Start/stop all storage batches with Batch menu item or with BATCH
CONTROL discrete.
Initializing a new disk. 232
Loading storage settings from disk to controller. 233
Viewing current storage settings. 234
Starting new storage settings. 235
Storing storage settings from controller to disk. 236
Viewing Status Line storage indicator. 236
Analyzing data stored on disk. See SDA manual

(Part #51-52-25-51).
9/03
Data Storage
View storage status

This function shows the remaining disk capacities for each data type along with other storage statuses.
TIP
This display can be configured for access under any Display Group key.
DATA STORAGE STATUS JAN31

11:30
REMAINING
TREND 1 02 10 15 Y
TREND 2 01 05 20 Y
POINT LOG ROLL N
ALARM SAMPLES 100 Y
EVENT SAMPLES 95 Y
WARNING LEVEL % 90
BATCH NUMBER 0 OFF
SYSTEM: NORMAL
DISK: NORMAL
ENABLE STORAGE ENABLED
Figure 69 View storage status
Table 138 View storage status details
Feature Description
Y Indicates that storage is enabled for this data type. See Storage controls
(page 231). See External Enable (Table 140).
N Indicates that storage is disabled for this data type. See Storage controls
(page 231). See External Enable (Table 140).
TREND 1 XX XX XX Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 1 data
Or Or
TREND 1 ROLL Trend 1 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the
disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
data. No Disk Warning will be given. See WARNING LEVEL %.
TREND 2 XX XX XX Days, Hours, Minutes remaining on disk for Trend 2 data
Or Or
TREND 2 ROLL Trend 2 is in Rollover, which means when the trend space is full on the
disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
POINT LOG XXX Number of point log samples remaining on disk
Or Or
POINT LOG ROLL Point Log is in Rollover, which means when the point log space is full on
the disk, storage will roll over (continue) and will replace the oldest existing
9/03
Data Storage
Feature Description
ALARM SAMPLES XXX Number of alarms remaining on disk
Or Or
ALARM SAMPLES ROLL Alarm storage is in Rollover, which means when the alarm space is full on
EVENT SAMPLES XXX Number of events remaining on disk
Or Or
EVENT SAMPLES ROLL Event storage is in Rollover, which means when the event space is full on
WARNING LEVEL % When any data type (trend, point log, or alarms/events) reaches this % of
its disk capacity, a disk warning message is displayed.
BATCH NUMBER Current batch number of all data batches. Zero (0) indicates batch storage
has not started.
Current batch status (ON/OFF) indicates whether batch storage is active.
SYSTEM: Indicates status of data storage system
DISK: Indicates status of disk
ENABLE STORAGE Indicates whether all data storage is enabled or disabled. DISABLED
means no storage is occurring, regardless of Y/N status above. See
Storage controls (page 231).
9/03
Data Storage
Storage controls
This screen lets you enable and disable part or all of data storage.
STORAGE CONTROLS
DATA STORAGE ENABLE
BATCH COMMAND START
TRENDS ENABLE
POINT LOG ENABLE
ALARMS/EVENTS ENABLE
Figure 70 Storage controls
Table 139 Storage controls details
Feature Description
DATA STORAGE ENABLE: Select this to enable all of data storage. Must be selected for any
storage to occur.
DISABLE: Select this to disable all of data storage. If disabled, no storage will
occur.
BATCH COMMAND* START: Select this to start batch storage.
STOP: Select this to stop batch storage.
This affects only batch data; it does not affect continuous or on-command data.
Batch data collected between a start and the following stop is assigned a batch
number. With each selection of START, the batch number increments by 1.
TRENDS* ENABLE: Select this to enable trend storage.
DISABLE: Select this to disable trend storage. If disabled, no trend storage will
occur.
POINT LOG* ENABLE: Select this to enable Point Log storage.
DISABLE: Select this to disable Point Log storage. If disabled, no Point Log
storage will occur.
ALARMS/EVENTS* ENABLE: Select this to enable Alarm/Event storage.
DISABLE: Select this to disable Alarm/Event storage. If disabled, no

Alarm/Event storage will occur.
* Does not appear if programmed as an external enable.
9/03
Data Storage
Initialize storage disk

Formats the disk for data storage. Use this to continue the current storage settings onto a new disk.
After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename
extensions.
(Do Not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name Use DOS compatible file names)
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events
DATA STORAGE
VIEW STORAGE STATUS

VIEW STORAGE SETTINGS
STORAGE CONTROLS
WARNING
INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK
INITIALIZATION
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS WILL
ERASE ALL EXISTING
STORE STORAGE SETTINGS
DISK FILES AND DATA
PRESS ENTER TO INIT
PRESS ESC TO ABORT
Figure 71 Initialize storage disk

Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.
9/03
Data Storage
Load storage settings

Select this to load data storage settings from the disk to the controller. Data Storage Setting files have
extension .DSS. Use this function to:
load data storage settings that were stored to disk from another controller.
LOAD STORAGE SETTINGS
FILE 01 DSS
FILE 02 DSS
FILE 03 DSS
Figure 72 Load storage settings

Move cursor to desired file and press Enter. A message then warns you that the load will overwrite the
existing storage settings. To complete the load, press Enter, or to abort it press Escape.
TIP
To begin storage using the loaded settings, select Start New Storage Settings. See Start new
storage settings (page 235).
9/03
Data Storage
View storage settings

This lets you view (not change) the settingsas configured in the Hybrid Control Designerof trends,
point log, and alarms/events. All these settings comprise the .DSS file, which can be loaded from the disk
to the controller, or stored from the controller to the disk.
Select a data type and press Enter to see the settings for that data type.
DATA STORAGE SETTINGS TREND 1 STORAGE

STORAGE MODE CONTINUOUS
TREND 1 STORAGE EXTERNAL ENABLE TAGNAME1
TREND 2 STORAGE ROLLOVER ON
POINT LOG STORAGE FILE NAME TREND01.LNT
ALARM/EVENT STORAGE STORAGE INTERVAL 10 SECS
BATCH INPUT POINT 1 TAGNAME1
STARTUP POINT 2 TAGNAME2
POINT 3 TAGNAME3
POINT 4 TAGNAME4
POINT 5 TAGNAME5
POINT 6 TAGNAME6
POINT 7 TAGNAME7
POINT 8 TAGNAME8
POINT 9 TAGNAME9
POINT 10 TAGNAM10
POINT 11 TAGNAM11

POINT 12
ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S
TAGNAM12
HZ RUN
Figure 73 View storage settings
Table 140 View storage setting details
Feature Description
STORAGE MODE CONTINUOUS: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval.
BATCH: data is sampled periodically at the storage interval and is separated

into numbered batches.
ON COMMAND: Point Log data is sampled once only, when the External Enable
switches from off to on or when you change Point Log from Disable to Enable on
the Storage Control menu.
EXTERNAL ENABLE Name of digital signal that is controlling the storage for the selected data type.
When this digital signal is on, the data types storage is enabled; when off,
disabled.
If NONE, then storage for this data type is controlled through that data types
enabler on the Storage Control menu (Figure 70).
ROLLOVER When rollover is ON, the data types storage will never fill up the disk but will
continually replace existing disk data with new incoming data. When rollover is
OFF, the disk will eventually fill up with data and will not accept more incoming
data unless a new disk is inserted.
FILE NAME 8 character file name of data being stored to disk. This name is used to identify
the file you want to replace on a PC. The filename extension indicates the type
of data in the file: (Do not use backslashes \\ or decimal points in file name)
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events
STORAGE How often data is sampled in continuous or batch modes. Point Log On
INTERVAL Command does not use a storage interval.
9/03
Data Storage
Feature Description
START TIME / For Point Log, select this to view the Start Time and Storage Interval.
INTERVAL
POINT 1 For all storage except Alarms/Events, up to 12 Points being stored.

POINT 12
RECORD COUNT The maximum number of records in a Point Log file.
ALARM RECORD The maximum number of records in an Alarm file.

COUNT
EVENT RECORD The maximum number of records in an Event file.

COUNT
Start new storage settings

Formats the disk for data storage using the new storage settings. Use this after loading storage settings.
After initializing, a separate file is allocated for each data storage type, using the following filename
extensions.
.LNT = Trend
.LNP = Point Log
.LNA = Alarms
.LNE = Events
DATA STORAGE
VIEW STORAGE STATUS

STORAGE CONTROLS
INITIALIZE STORAGE DISK
LOAD STORAGE WARNING
SETTINGS
STARTSTORAGE
STORE NEW STORAGE SETTINGS
SETTINGS
INITIALIZATION WILL
ERASE ALL EXISTING
DISK FILES AND DATA
PRESS ENTER TO INIT
PRESS ESC TO ABORT
Figure 74 Start new storage settings
Press Enter to initialize the disk or press Escape to cancel and return to the Data Storage menu.
9/03
Data Storage
Store storage settings

This lets you store the controllers storage settings to disk. You can view the current settings under View
storage settings (Figure 73).
You can store different settings to disk, then load them when needed.
STORE STORAGE SETTINGS
FILE FILE 01 DSS

FILES ON DISK:
FILE01 DSS
FILE02 DSS
FILE03 DSS
RECORD01 DSS
RECORD02 DSS
Figure 75 Store storage settings

Use the Increment and Decrement keys to select a filename and number for the settings. A .DSS extension
will automatically be added to the filename. Press Enter to proceed with the load.
Status line storage indicator

A storage indicator (S) appears on the status line at the bottom of the display when data storage is active.
When the indicator is not visible, the user can determine why storage is inactive by accessing the Storage
Status display (Figure 69) or the Storage Controls display (Figure 70).
9/03
Log Off/Log On
Access
Main menu.
Description
Access the Log Off display to
deter unwanted users from interacting with the instrument. If Log Off security is enabled the operator
must enter a security code to log on. See Set Security/Review Security (page 156).
learn the part number and firmware revision number of the OI.
Table 141 Log off display details
Feature Description
PRESS ENTER TO Press Enter to return to the process. If security is not enabled, you are returned to the
LOG ON Display Group 1 keys first display. If security is enabled, you are prompted to enter the
security code before gaining access to the display.
PART # OI firmware part number.
REV. # OI firmware revision number.
SUPPORTING TEXT Custom text from the Startup Display (page 19).
9/03
Log Off/Log On
9/03
Other Operating Displays
Overview
The following operating displays are also configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.
Pushbutton Displays
4-Selector Switch Display
Device Control Display
Hand/Off/Auto Switch Display
Stage Operate Display
Ramp Operate Display
Alternator Operate Display
They are accessed by pressing the keys below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to scroll through
up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have all these
displays configured.
Pushbuttons
Pushbutton display has four functions. To perform the function description, press the corresponding F1-F4
key located immediately to the right of the display. For example, press F1 to perform the topmost function.
Description
Accessed through any Display Group key (as configured).
Use F1 F4 keys to issue discrete control.
Shows feedback of an associated discrete state or an analog value.
Shows text description of the action performed.
PUSHBUTTONS
TAG45678 FUNCTION DESCRIP

F1
STATE1

F2
12345.6

F3
1234.56

F4
STATE2
Figure 76 Pushbutton menu with function keys

Table 142 Pushbutton details
Feature Description
Tag Name of the discrete or analog signal.
State/Value State of the signal (ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSED, etc.) or current value.
Function Description of the function. To perform the function, press the
corresponding F1-F4 key located immediately to the right of the display.
9/03
4-Selector Switch
4-Selector Switch
This display has four functions accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. Once a
function is selected, you can select one of four possible states for that function. That is, the function acts as
a 4-position rotary switch, with one and only one state in effect at any time.
4 POSITION SWITCHES
FUNCTION DESCRIP1 STATE1
F1

F2

F3

F4
Figure 77 Four selector switch display
Table 143 Four selector switch details
Feature Description
FUNCTION DESCRP1 Name of the function accessed by F1 key.

STATE1 Current state of F1 function.
To select a function, press the key corresponding to that function. A popup menu appears. See Figure 78.
This popup menu shows the four selectable states for the function you chose. Only one state at a time is
allowed.
4 POSITION SWITCHES
F1

FUNCTION DESCR F2
STATE A
FUNCTION DESCRIP3
STATE B STATE4
STATE C F3
STATE D

USE ARROW KEYS TO SELECT
PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE F4
PRESS ESC TO ABORT
Figure 78 Four selector switch popup menu
9/03
Device Control
Device Control
This display has four device controls accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. There
are four device controls per display, for a total of four displays. The order of the device controls can be
changed with the Hybrid Control Designer.
When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened.
DEVICE CONTROL
DEVTAG1 READY 99999 SECS F1
DEVTAG2 PRESTART 99999 SECS F1
DEVTAG3 STARTING 99999 SECS F1
DEVTAG4 RUNNING 99999 SECS F1
Figure 79 Device control display
Table 144 Device control display details
Feature Description
DEVTAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration.
STATE READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING, DISABLED, or

FAILED.
99999 SECS Current Timer value. READ ONLY Counts down to zero.
The Start Delay Timer is active in the Prestart state
The Stop Delay Timer is active in the Stopping state
The Feedback timer is active in the Starting state while the Feedback
input pin is OFF.
The Feedback timer is active in the Running state (if the Feedback
input turned on in the starting state.)
9/03
Device Control
Change the current delay times

When you press the F# key on the display, the EDIT DEVICE display is opened. You can change the
current delay times for START, STOP, and FEEDBACK FAIL Timers.
EDIT DEVICE
DEVTAG1 READY
START DELAY TIME(SECS) 99999

STOP DELAY TIME (SECS) 99999
FEEDBACK FAIL TIME (SECS) 99999
RESET FAILURE
Figure 80 Edit device display
Table 145 Edit device display details
Feature Description
DEVTAG1 Tag name defined during block configuration READ ONLY.
READY Current state of device Located in the lower right corner of the title area
of the display. READY, PRESTART, STARTING, RUNNING, STOPPING,
DISABLED, or FAIL.
START DELAY TIME Current start delay time in seconds
STOP DELAY TIME Current stop delay time in seconds
FEEDBACK FAIL TIME Current feedback fail delay time in seconds
RESET FAILURE The device may only be reset if it is currently in the failure state, the ERR
(failure) input pin on the function block is OFF, and the Automatic Reset
parameter (configured on the Hybrid Control Designer) is OFF. Otherwise
a warning dialog is displayed explaining the reason why the Device Reset
Request failed. Reasons for ignoring reset request:
a. Failure Input pin is ON.
b. Automatic Reset is enabled.
c. Device is not in Failure state.
TIP
If you select the ESC key, the OI will return to the Device Control Operator display.
9/03
Hand/Off/Auto Switch
Hand/Off/Auto Switch
This display has four HOA switches accessible by the four function keys to the right of the display. The
order of the HOA switches can be changed using the Hybrid Control Designer.
When you select one of the F# keys on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is
opened.
HAND/OFF AUTO SWITCHES
TAG00001 HOATAG1
AUTO F1
STATE1
TAG00002 HOATAG2
BYPASS F2
STATE4
TAG00003 HOATAG3
HAND F3
STATE2
TAG00004 HOATAG4
OFF F4
STATE7
Figure 81 Hand/Off/Auto switch display
Table 146 Hand/Off/Auto switch display details
Feature Description
TAGxxxxx Eight-character tag name of the feedback signal providing the analog
value for the State enumeration.
STATE# Eight-character State enumeration defined during block configuration.
HOATAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration READ ONLY.
STATE OF SWITCH HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS
Set the HOA switch state

When you press an F# key on the display, the SET HAND/OFF/AUTO SWITCH display is opened. If you
select the ESC key, the OI will return to the HOA Switch Operator display.
Table 147 Set HOA switch state display details
Feature Description
HOATAG# Block tag name defined during block configuration.
CURRENT STATE HAND, OFF, AUTO, or BYPASS (see note)
CHANGE SOURCE LOCAL, REMOTE, LOCAL/REMOTE
SET STATE Select OFF, AUTO, or HAND (see note)
Note: If the current state is BYPASS, any requests to change the state
are ignored.
9/03
Stage
Stage
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Stages grouped together in the Stage
function block and edit the following parameters for each Stage:
ON DELAY TIME
OFF DELAY TIME
SP_ON
SP_OFF
INTERLOCK_PREV
INTERLOCK_NEXT
STAGEOP1 12:30
PV1 45.00 EU1

PV2 400.000 EU2
PV INTLK OVRD REQ
STAGENM1 1 NEXT NONE
STAGENM2 1,2 BOTH NONE
STAGENM3 1,2 PREV NONE
STAGENM4 1 NONE OFF
EDIT STAGE
Figure 82 Stage operator display
Table 148 Stage operator display details
Feature Description
STAGEOP1 Block tag name configured during block configuration READ ONLY
PV1 PV1 input pin of the function block (pressure)
PV2 PV2 input pin of the function block (flow)
EU1 Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration
EU2 Engineering units and decimal places defined during block configuration
STAGENM# Stage label configured during block configuration READ ONLY
PV 1 = Both PVs are PV1
2 = Both PVs are PV2
1,2 = PV ON = PV1 and PV OFF = PV2
2,1 = PV ON = PV2 and PV OFF = PV1
INTLK NONE = No Interlocking
NEXT = Interlocked with next stage
PREV = Interlocked with previous stage
BOTH = Interlocked with next and previous stage
ERROR = The configured interlock is incorrect
OVRD NONE, ON, and OFF Override On [4] input pins and Override Off [4]
input pins of the function block
REQ Request is ON
Request is OFF
Request is OFF and Stage is DISABLED
EDIT STAGE n When you select EDIT STAGE, an Engineering Security pop-up is
displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control
Designer configuration. After the security code is entered the Edit Stage
display will appear.
9/03
Stage
Edit stage display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Stage number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the
ESC key, the OI will return to the Stage Operator display.
Table 149 Edit stage display details
Feature Description
EU1, EU2 Engineering units for PV1 or PV2 display four characters
EDIT STAGE # Stage selected on Edit Stage sub-menu
ON DELAY TIME Delay prior to latching the output ON

Range: 0-9999 seconds
OFF DELAY TIME Delay prior to latching the output OFF

SP_ON* Setpoint used with ON comparator No range limit
SP_OFF* Setpoint used with OFF comparator No range limit
INTERLOCK_PREV Interlock with previous stage

Select NO or YES
INTERLOCK_NEXT Interlock with next stage

Select NO or YES
*The number of decimal places and the engineering units for SP_ON and SP_OFF must match the associated PV
parameters decimal places and engineering units.
9/03
Ramp
Ramp
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the four Ramps grouped together in the Ramp
function block and edit the following parameters for each Ramp:
LAG TIME
TRANSFER RATES
OUTPUT SCALE HIGH
OUTPUT SCALE LOW
INPUT HIGH LIMIT
INPUT LOW LIMIT
RAMPOPD1 12:30
STATUS ENABLED
INPUT 45.00 EU1
OUTPUT 400.000 EU2
ENABLED OVERRIDE
1 RAMPLBL1 YES OFF
2 RAMPLBL2 YES HIGH
3 RAMPLBL3 YES HIGH
4 RAMPLBL4 NO OFF
EDIT RAMP
Figure 83 Ramp operator display
Table 150 Ramp operator display details
Feature Description
RAMPOPD1 Block tag name
STATUS ENABLED or DISABLED (DIS) input pin of function block
INPUT PV input pin of function block
OUTPUT Output pin of function block
EU1 Engineering units of the PV defined during block
EU2 Engineering units of the Output defined during block configuration
RAMPLBL# Label defined during configuration

ENABLED Enable (YES) or Disable (NO) [4] input pins of function block.
OVERRIDE OFF, LOW, or HIGH Override [4] input pins
EDIT RAMP When you select EDIT RAMP, an Engineering Security pop-up is
displayed if the SET UNIT security was selected in Hybrid Control
Designer configuration. After the security code is entered, an Edit Ramp
sub-menu is opened.
9/03
Ramp
Edit ramp display

This display opens when you select the EDIT RAMP on the Ramp Operator display. You can select a
Ramp to edit and also change parameters (LAG TIME, TRANSFER RATE UP, TRANSFER RATE
DOWN).
Select ESC to return to Ramp Operator display.
Table 151 Edit ramp sub-menu display details
Feature Description
EDIT RAMP # Select EDIT RAMP # to open the Edit Ramp display.
TRNSFR RATE UP (EU) Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a higher
value (bumpless analog transfer)
Range: 0-99999 EU/second
TRNSFR RATE DN (EU) Transfer rate in engineering units/second when switching to a lower value
(bumpless analog transfer)
Range: 0-99999 EU/second
LAG TIME (SEC) Lag Time constant on PV signal

Range: 0.0 seconds to 120.0 seconds 0 = NO LAG
9/03
Ramp
Edit ramp display

This display lets you edit the parameters for the Ramp number selected on the sub-menu. If you select the
ESC key, the OI will return to the Ramp Operator display.
Table 152 Edit ramp display details
Feature Description
EDIT RAMP # Ramp selected on Edit Ramp sub-menu READ ONLY
OUT SCALE HIGH* High output limit after rescale

Range: Full scale +/
OUT SCALE LOW* Low output limit after rescale

IN HIGH LIMIT* Input high limit value applied to the PV after signal lag
IN LOW LIMIT* Input low limit value applied to the PV after signal lag
*The number of decimal places and the engineering units must match the associated Input and Output parameters
decimal places and engineering units.
9/03
Alternator
Alternator
This display lets you see the operating parameters for the ALT function block and edit the following
parameters:
Style
On-Delay Time (sec)
Off-Delay Time (sec)
Output selections
Input selections
Output sequence
ALTRNTR1 12:30 ALTRNTR1 12:30

STATE STATUS DEMAND STYLE STATE STATUS DEMAND STYLE
RUN OK 8 ROTARY F1 RUN OK 8 DIRECT F1
ADV ADV
IN # 1 - 8 IN # 1 - 8
9 - 16 9 - 16
F2 F2
EDIT EDIT
OUT OUT DMND OUT DMND OUT OUT OUT IN # OUT IN # OUT
1 9 1 1 9 0 1 9 1 2 9 0
2 10 2 2 10 0 2 10 2 4 10 0
3 11 3 3 11 0 3 11 3 6 11 0
4 12 4 4 12 0 4 12 4 1 12 0
5 13 5 5 13 0 5 13 5 3 13 0
6 14 6 6 14 0 6 14 6 5 14 0
7 15 7 0 15 0 7 15 7 0 15 0
8 16 8 0 16 0 8 16 8 0 16 0
Figure 84 Alternator operator displays
9/03
Alternator
Table 153 Alternator operator display details
Feature Description
ALTRNTR1 Block tag name READ ONLY
STATE OFF or RUN READ ONLY
STATUS OK, DISABLED, or HIGH READ ONLY
DEMAND [DMND] Input count, between 0 and 16 READ ONLY
STYLE ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, or DIRECT READ ONLY
NOTE: If the current style is DIRECT, the OUT number corresponds to the
Input sequence that requests the OUT to turn ON. With any other style,
the OUT number corresponds to the number of INs (DMND) that need to
be ON to turn the OUT on.
IN# (LEDs) Input is ON

Input is OFF
Input selection is disabled
OUT (LEDs) Output is ON

Output is OFF
Output is disabled
No LED The output is not used.
OUTPUT STATUS Blank Normal operating output (no designation)

DNR Device Not Ready (see Alternator Operator display for example)
OUT [16] Integer between 0 and 16

0 indicates the output is not in the Output sequence.
F1 (ADV) Advances the output sequence. (An operator security pop-up will appear if
SPP OP is selected on the OI settings dialog box on the Hybrid Control
Designer.)
If the current style is DIRECT, or the manual advance option was not
selected in the ALT block configuration on the Hybrid Control Designer,
there is no effect when you select F1.
F2 (EDIT) Displays the EDIT ALTERNATOR display. See below.
9/03
Alternator
Edit alternator display

This display opens when you select F2 (edit) on the Alternator Operator display. You can choose to edit
output selections, edit input selections, edit output sequence, and also edit the parameters (Style, On delay
time, and Off delay time).
Table 154 Edit alternator display details
Feature Description
ALTRNTR1 Block tag name READ ONLY
MAKE/BREAK MAKE (Make before Break) Next output in the sequence is activated
before deactivating an output.
BREAK (Break before Make) The output is removed before advancing

the sequence and activating the next output.
MAKE/BREAK is READ ONLY.
STYLE Select from ROTARY, FOFO, FIXED, and DIRECT (If different style is
selected, the change will not occur until all outputs are in the OFF state.)
ON DELAY TIME (SEC) Delay time used before turning ON the next output in the sequence
OFF DELAY TIME (SEC) Delay time used before turning OFF the next output in the sequence
EDIT OUTPUT SELECTIONS Opens the Edit Output Selections display. At this display the options are:
If selection is NOT USED, you CANNOT change it. Select ENABLED to

turn ON the output pin.
Select ENABLED:
OUT # pin turns ON.
The READY status of the associated DENC Input number is ON.
The associated alternator input number is ON.
Select DISABLED:
OUT # pin turns OFF, regardless of other values.
EDIT INPUT SELECTIONS Opens the Edit Input Selections display. You can change the Input
Enable parameter by selecting ENABLED or DISABLED.
EDIT OUTPUT SEQUENCE Opens the Edit Output Sequence display. See Table 155.
9/03
Alternator
Edit output sequence

This display lets you change the Output Sequence. Examples of reasons to change it include:
If you are having trouble with a motor or pump (e.g., a bearing is going bad) and you want to limit the
amount of time it is used.
If you have 3 motors and one uses more electricity than another, you may want to use two small motors
first before you use the one large motor. This could be handled by changing the sequence.
Taking a pump out of service for maintenance.
Table 155 Edit output sequence display details
Feature Description
IN #* or DEMAND* IN # Will appear if Style is DIRECT.

DEMAND Will appear if Style is FIXED.
NOTE: If current style is not FIXED or DIRECT, message EDITS NOT

ALLOWED IN THIS STYLE will appear.
OUT** To change the OUT sequence, select a value between 1 and 16.
NOTE: A value of 0 cannot be changed.
*If the Style changes to ROTARY or FOFO when using Edit Output Sequence display, message INVALID
STYLE will be displayed instead of IN # or DEMAND.
**If ESC, ALARM, HELP, etc. keys are selected, a display will ask if you want to Save or Cancel the current output
sequence.
Select SAVE: Pop-up message states NEW OUTPUT SEQUENCE BEING WRITTEN TO
CONTROLLER. If write fails, error message is displayed.
Select CANCEL: The EDIT ALTERNATOR display is viewed. No changes are written to controller.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Overview
Monitoring displays are configured using the Hybrid Control Designer.
1
They are accessed by pressing through 5 [ 8 ] below the display. Use Page Up and Page Down to
scroll through up to ten displays assigned to each Display Group key. Your OI may not necessarily have
all these displays configured.
You can monitor but not change any data on these displays except for variables on an overview display.
See also
While viewing these displays, messages may be displayed. See Table 164 for message descriptions.
Topic Page
Trend Displays: 254
Horizontal Trend
Vertical Trend
Vertical Trend w/ Horizontal Bars
Horizontal Trend w/ Digital
Horizontal Trend w/ Bar Graphs
Bar Graph Displays: 258
6 Point Horizontal
6 Point Vertical
3 Point Horizontal
3 Point Vertical
Panel Displays: 259
Single Point Panel

4-Point Panel
Multi Point Panel
Overview
Other Displays: 263
Help
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays
Trend Displays
Each of the trend displays shows up to 6 points as trends. The text changes at regular intervals to describe
the name, current value, limits, and engineering units of the corresponding trend. The color of the text
matches the color of the trend: yellow text describes the yellow trend, green text describes the green trend,
and so on for each of the six trends.
FURNACE TEMPERATURE DEC08

AI2 2200.00 DEGF AI2 12:18
2200.00 DEGF
2500.0
11:18 11:30
TREND1
10:30 2000.00
10:20 TREND2
1934.00
10:10 TREND3
1566.00
10:00 TREND4
1366.00
9:50 TREND5
1254.00
1500.0 TREND6
1521.00
0
ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S HZ RUN ALARM D MESSAGE TEXT S HZ RUN
Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend w/ Digital
FURNACE TEMPERATURE DEC08

AI2 12:18 AI2 2200.00 DEGF
2200.00 DEGF
1500.0 2500.0
11:18 11:30
10:30
10:20
10:10
10:00
9:50
0
Horizontal Trend w/ Bars Vertical Trend w/ Bars
AI2 2200.00 DEGF

1500.0 2500.0
10:30
10:20
10:10
10:00
9:50
Vertical Trend
Figure 85 Trend displays
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays
Table 156 Example of trend details
Feature Description
AI2 Name of one of 6 points displayed.
2200.00 The current value of the point.
DEGF Engineering units of the point.
1500.0 Lower display limit of the point.
2500.0 Upper display limit of the point.
09:40, 09:50, etc. Time stamps.
Colored Arrow Positioned at the current value of the point.
Vertical and Horizontal Bar Color of the bar will match the color of the trend line, pointer, and live
Graphs* value.
POINT1POINT6** Shows the value of each trend in matching color.
* Horizontal or Vertical Trend with Bar Graph only

** Horizontal Trend with Digital only
TIP
Press Detail to display a menu with advanced features. See Trend menu.
Log Scale Trending

The Hybrid Control Designer lets you configure a signal tag to be displayed in exponential notation. When
E-notation is active, values will be displayed in exponential notation; for example, 2500 will be displayed
as 2.5E3. When you select a signal tage with E-notation as the first signal tag when configuring a Trend
group, the OI will display the Trend in Log Scale format.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays
Trend menu
From any trend display, press Detail to display the following menu.
Table 157 Trend menu
Prompt Description
SCROLL Press Increment or Decrement to scroll the trend forward or backward in time. Press Detail to
change to the next point on a multi-point trend. Amount of scrollable data is inversely proportional
to the number of trend groups and points; that is, the more trend points that are configured, the
less data that can be scrolled to.
Press Escape to restore the Trend menu. The trend display will remain at the time determined by
the SCROLL.
Press Escape to restore the original trend display and cancel the SCROLL.
SET HOLD, Causes one point to remain displayed in the scoreboard. Available for live trend only.
Before selecting SET HOLD, press Detail to change the scoreboard to the desired point. Select
REL HOLD SET HOLD and press Enter. An H appears in the lower right display. The HOLD will remain in
effect until deliberately removed with REL HOLD.
To HOLD a different point, press Detail until the desired point is shown, then press Escape.
To release the HOLD, select REL HOLD.
DETAIL Use the Increment and Decrement keys to move the line cursor forward or backward in time. The
value of the displayed point will change to its value at the new time.
If desired, press Detail to change to the next point on a multi-point trend.
Press Escape to restore the menu. The trend display will remain at the chosen point.
Press Escape to restore the trend display and to cancel DETAIL.
ZOOM Lets you magnify (zoom) the displayed scale.

Press Increment and Decrement to select the amount of magnification, shown in the lower right
corner of the display. Note that the size of the Zoom cursor changes accordingly. See Figure 86.
OFF uses points programmed limits (turns Zoom off)
2X uses half of points programmed limits
4X uses one fourth of points programmed limits.
For example, assume the currently selected point has limits of 0 and 1000 degrees F and its
current value is 500. If you select a zoom of 2X, the point will be displayed with limits of 250 and
750 degrees F.
Note that zooming in on a screen with a wide time span may cause the trend to appear jagged due
to the slow sampling rate for wide screens. See Table 158.
Press Detail to select the point/trace to be zoomed (magnified).
Press Enter to display the magnified trend. The popup menu is displayed to allow further analysis.
Press Escape to restore the trend display with the ZOOM limits. A Z appears in the lower right of
the display.
Alternate method of scrolling

A trend can be also be scrolled by pressing Increment and Decrement without pressing Detail. While in
scroll mode, press Escape once to see the trend menu, or press Escape twice to return the live screen.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Trend Displays
Sampling rates of trends

The longer the time span of a trend display, the less often the points are sampled.
Table 158 Sampling rates of trends
Time span of screen Rate at which points are

sampled
30 minutes 6 seconds
1 hour 12 seconds
2 hours 24 seconds
4 hours 48 seconds
8 hours 96 seconds
24 hours 288 seconds
Example of trend zoom
TEMP7 1941.5 DEGF

1500.0 2500.0
Zoom cursor
12:15
11:45
11:15
Amount of
magnification
2X
ALM Z RUN
Figure 86 Vertical trend at 2X zoom
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Bar Graph Displays
Bar Graph Displays

These displays show 3 or 6 points in a vertical or horizontal bar graph format. The 6 bar displays
periodically rotate through the name and value of each point.
TEMP 1 TEMP 2 TEMP 3

2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 TEMP 1
1234.50 DEGF
1000.0 2500.0
TEMP 2
1234.50 DEGF
1000.0 2500.0
TEMP 3
1000.0 1000.0 1000.0
1234.50 DEGF
1234.50 1234.50 1234.50
DEGF DEGF DEGF 1000.0 2500.0
3 point vertical bar graph 3 point horizontal bar graph
TEMP 1
TEMP1 1234.50 DEGF 1234.50 DEGF
2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 2500.0 2500.0
1234.50
DEGF 1500.0 TEMP1 2500.0
1234.50
DEGF 1500.0 TEMP2 2500.0
1234.50
DEGF 1500.0 TEMP3 2500.0
1234.50
DEGF 1500.0 TEMP4 2500.0
1234.50
DEGF 1500.0 TEMP5 2500.0
1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0
1234.5 1234.5 1234.5 1234.5 1234.5 1234.5 1234.50
DEGF DEGF DEGF DEGF DEGF DEGF DEGF
TEMP1 TEMP2 TEMP3 TEMP4 TEMP5 TEMP6 1500.0 TEMP6 2500.0
6 point vertical bar graph 6 point horizontal bar graph
Figure 87 Bar graph displays
Table 159 Bar graph display details
Feature Description
TEMP n Name of the displayed point.
1234.50 The current value of the point.
DEGF Engineering units of the point.
1000.0 Lower display limit of the point.
2500.0 Upper display limit of the point.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays
Panel Displays
Single point rotating panel
This display is readable from a distance of approximately 30 (8 meters). Every 5 seconds it rotates to
another point, up to 12 points.
TAGNAME
TAGNAME
1500.0
DEGF
Figure 88 Panel display
Interacting with panel display
Stopping panel display rotation on a single point
Step Action Result
1 Press Detail Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the
display.
2 Press Detail Displays the desired point.
3 Press Enter Holds display on desired point. An H appears in the lower right of
the display.
Resuming panel display rotation through all points
Step Action Result
1 Press Detail Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the
display.
2 Press Enter The H disappears and rotation resumes.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays
4-point panel
This display shows the status and values for four analog and digital points in a panel format. The display is
view only. A digital points ON state is indicated On by a yellow dot. No dot indicates OFF state.
4-POINT PANEL TITLE
INTRUSN ZONE 1
ON 205.00
DEGF
TEMP 2 ZONE 2
134.4 456.2
DEGC DEGF
Figure 89 4-point panel display
Table 160 4-point panel details
Feature Description
TAGNAMEn Name of the displayed point.
Value or State The current value or state of the point.
EU Engineering units of the point.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays
Multi-point panel
This display contains 3 large points for distance viewing, and 4 smaller points for close-up viewing. The
display is VIEW only.
PANEL GROUP 1
TAGNAME1 2205.0 DEGF
TAGNAME3 ON
TAGNAME4 205.0 DEGF
TAGNAME5 OFF
TAGNAME6 83.5 DEGF
TAGNAME7 ON
Figure 90 Multi-point panel display

Table 161 Multi-point panel details
Feature Description
TAGNAMEn Name of the displayed point.
Value or State The current value or state of the point.
EU Engineering units of the point.
Panel meter
Displays status and value of twelve analog and digital points in a panel format. This display is view-only.
A digital points ON state is indicated ON by a yellow dot; no dot indicates OFF state.
MY PANEL METER
TAG-0002
TAG-0001 TAG-0003
12345.67
STATE1 STATE2
DEGF
TAG-0004 TAG-0006
TAG-0005
12345.67 12345.67
STATE2
DEGF DEGF
TAG-0007 TAG-0008 TAG-0009
TAG-0010 TAG-0011 TAG-0012
12345.67 12345.67 12345.67
PSI DEGC DEGF
Figure 91 Panel meter
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Panel Displays
Overview
Displays value and status of up to twelve analog and digital signals and variables in a list format. The
variables in an overview group can be edited.
OVERVIEW GROUP 1 11:30
TAGNAME1 0.00 DEGF

TAGNAME3 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME4 ON
TAGNAME5 OFF
TAGNAME6 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME7 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME8 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME9 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME10 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME11 0.00 DEGF
TAGNAME12 0.00 DEGF
Figure 92 Overview
Description
A signal tag is an identifier connected to a digital or analog output pin of a function block. It is read-only
on this display.
A variable tag is a digital or analog object connection to an input pin of a function block. It can be edited on
this display.
Table 162 Overview details
Feature Description
TAG NAME n Name of variable or signal.
Value or state Current value or state of the variable or signal. Press Enter to edit a variable. A
popup window shows the tag name and value or state. You can change an
analog variable to any value within its configured limits, and a digital variable to
its ON or OFF state. Press Enter to keep the changes or press Escape to cancel
the changes.
TIP
If you enter a new value or state for a variable that is not accepted, the variable might be
getting its value or state from another source, namely, a Recipe Load function block within the
controllers configuration. Consider reconfiguring the controller.
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Other Displays
Other Displays
Help
Up to 10 pages of custom help messages may be accessed under the Help key. These displays may also be
configured for access by the Display Group keys.
MESSAGES
PAGE 1
START-UP NOTES:
USE RECIPE #1 AFTER SHUTDOWN.

CHANGE SETPT TO 450.
SHUT OFF PUMP#1.
TURN ON WATER VALVE.
RESET LIMIT CONTROL.
VERIFY WATER LEVEL ON TANK#1.
Figure 93 Help (messages) display
9/03
Monitoring Displays
Other Displays
9/03
Maintenance
EXPLOSION HAZARD
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
Replace parts with appropriate Honeywell parts only. Failure to do so may result in
explosion causing death or serious injury.
Overview
See Unit Setup (page 153) for common maintenance tasks.
See Parts below for hardware replacement.
Parts
The following parts may be ordered. To order, see the contact information in the front of this manual.
Table 163 Parts
Description Part Number Model
Firmware upgrade kit Floppy Disk 51451629-501 1042
Firmware upgrade kit Zip Disk 51451630-501 1042
Replacement display lamp 51451584-501 1042
Zip Disk Drive Kit 51451948-501 1042
Keypad 51500678-501 1042
Display 51404764-501 1042
RS485 communications cable (50 ft.) 51452101-050 All OIs
Terminal Board Assembly 51404600-501 All OIs
Disk Drive Kit 51404557-501 All OIs
Replacement display lamp 51404610-501 559 common
Cable Kit 51404797-501 559 common
Inverter Board 51404597-501 559 common
Mounting Kit 51404524-501 559-T12
Keypad 51404493-501 559-T12
Operator Interface Cover (Type 4) 51500452-501 559-T12
Bezel and Case 51404551-501 559-T12
Mounting Kit 51451322-501 559-T4
9/03
Maintenance
Parts
Description Part Number Model
Keypad 51451320-501 559-T4
Panel Gasket 51451315-501 559-T4
Keyboard Connector Kit 51404533-501 559-T4
LCD Color Display with Backlight 51404528-501 559-T4
9/03
Messages
Overview
The OI displays messages that guide, advise, and warn the operator.
Table 164 shows all messages, the function in which the message appears, and a description along with any
recommended action.
Table 164 Messages
Message Function Description/Action Recommended
FORMATTING DISK Format Disk Disk formatting is in progress.
INITIALIZING DISK Data Storage disk The function is in progress.

initialization
TEST IN PROGRSS Disk Read/Write The test is in progress.

Self-Test
AED REPORT FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.
2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 19).
3. Reload configuration.
4. If message recurs, replace CPU.
ALARM / EVENT LOST Status line The message will appear if the controller's internal
alarm or event buffer overflows before the OI has a
chance to upload this information.
Make sure that the OI is powered on and is

communicating correctly with the controller.
BAD STORAGE SETUP Data storage disk Initialization failed because there are no active data
initialize storage groups. This will occur if the storage mode for
ALL of the data storage groups (Trend, Point Log,
Alarms, and Events) is set to Off. Note that if a Trend
or Point Log group has no Signal Tags defined, the
storage mode is Off by default when initialization
occurs.
Correct the Data Storage Setup and reinitialize.
BEGINNING OF BUFFER Scrolling Trends The beginning of the trend data buffer was reached
BEZEL OPEN Status line The door on the Oi that protects the disk drive is
currently open. Data will not be read from or written to
the disk while this door is open.
CHECKING DISK Status line The OI is currently validating the disk that was just
inserted.
CONTROLLER DIAG Status line The controller file has posted a diagnostic. Access
Controller Diagnostic display (page 136).
9/03
Messages
Overview
CONTROLLER DOES NOT Edit Program The controller will not accept edits to a
ACCEPT EDITS IN CURRENT Edit Segment program/segment/events/schedule/sequence with the
STATE/MODE Edit Segment associated programmer/scheduler/sequencer in its
Events current state.
Edit Schedule
Edit Sequence
DB ALLOC ERROR Status line and 1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 19
Panel Diagnostic
Log 2. Call the OI vendor for assistance.
DB RECORD ERROR Status line and 1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 19
Panel Diagnostic
Log 2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the
controller are compatible
3. Call the OI vendor for assistance

DB VERIFY ERROR Status line and 1. Do an Operator Cold Start as described on page 19
Panel Diagnostic
Log 2. Verify that the firmware versions of the OI and the
controller are compatible
3. Verify that there are no loose wires in the cable that

connects the OI and the controller
4. Call the OI vendor for assistance

If the OI reports this diagnostic, the following conditions
may also be present:
1. The alarm help message on the alarm detail display

will show "?????" if help text was set for that alarm
2. The 16-character signal descriptor will default to the

8-character signal tag
3. OI security is turned off

4. The parameter "Frequency" will show a value of
"Error" on the controller status display.
DEVICE ERROR Any disk operation Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted
disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the
cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.
DEVICE NEVER INITIALIZED Data Storage Use the service "Start New Storage Settings" to initialize
Initialization the disk instead of using "Initialize Storage Disk".
DISK ERROR Status line Unformatted or defective disk. Use a new, formatted
disk and retry the operation. If the error persists, the
cause is possibly faulty disk drive or disk drive interface.
DISK ERROR Status line An error was encountered accessing the disk. The disk
may be bad or the interface to the disk drive is not
functional.
9/03
Messages
Overview
DISK FULL Data Storage No more space is available on one or more of the files
on the disk for storage of data as programmed. This
message will appear only if at least one partition on the
disk is programmed for non-rollover operation. The
message will disappear when a new disk is initialized,
or if data storage is disabled (turned off).
DISK FULL Store to disk: Maximum 224 files per disk. Use another disk.
Config
Store recipe
Store profile
Store schedule
Store sequence
DISK MISSING Status line Data storage is enabled, but no disk is installed in the
disk drive.
DISK WARNING Status line Floppy disk is not full but available space on one or
more disk files has reached the programmed warning
limit. The message will disappear when a new disk is
initialized, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).
DS INIT FAILED Status line Initialization failed. Possible reasons: disk has not been
formatted, is write-protected, or is defective.
DS STATUS LOST Status line 1. Check for bad floppy disk.
2. Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.
3. Check seating of floppy cables.
4. Replace CPU.
DSK NOT CURRENT Status line When a disk is initialized the OI marks it as the current
disk. The instrument will only store data to the current
disk. If any other disk is placed in the drive this
message will appear. The message will disappear when
the current disk is inserted or a new disk is initialized.
END OF BUFFER Scrolling Trends The end of the trend data buffer was reached
ERROR EDITS NOT SAVED Edit Recipe A write transaction to the controller failed.
Edit Program
ERROR READ FAILED Edit Recipe A read transaction to the controller failed.
Edit Program
FILE DATA ERROR Any disk operation The requested disk operation failed because:
The disk has not been formatted. Format the disk and
retry the operation.
The disk is defective. Use a new, formatted disk and

retry the operation.
FILE DATA ERROR Format Disk If the floppy diskette reported less than 1,457,664 bytes
following a format, it is likely that the diskette has bad
sectors. Replace floppy disk.
9/03
Messages
Overview
FILE NOT FOUND ON DISK Any disk operation The specified file name contains an illegal character,
such as a forward slash (e.g. FILE/01.RCP). Remove
the illegal character from the file name and retry the
operation.
FORMAT COMPLETE Format Disk Disk formatting successfully completed.
GENERAL ERROR This message will appear if the instrument encounters

any error not listed above.
HANDSHAKE FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.

INITIALIZATION COMPLETE Data Storage disk The function successfully completed.
initialization
INITIALIZATION FAILED BEZEL Data Storage disk The requested disk operation failed because the front
OPEN initialization bezel was opened.
INITIALIZATION FAILED Data Storage disk The requested disk operation failed because the disk,
DEVICE ERROR initialization the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.
INITIALIZATION FAILED WRITE Data Storage disk The requested disk operation failed because the disk
PROTECTED initialization was write protected..
INITIALIZING DSK Status line The OI is initializing the data storage disk for the current
data storage set.
LOAD COMPLETE Load file from disk The function successfully completed.
LOAD/STORE LOCKED BY PC Load/store User attempts to load or store configuration data while a
HOST controller configuration file is being downloaded via the PC over
configuration another comm. port. The message will continue to
from/to disk appear until the PC download is complete. Wait until the
PC download has completed, and then restart the
load/store from the OI menu.
LOADING CONFIG xx% Load controller The function is in progress.

..WAIT.. configuration from
disk
LOADING PROFILE Load Profile from The function is in progress.

disk
LOADING RECIPE Load Recipe from The function is in progress.

disk
LOADING SCHEDULE Load Schedule The function is in progress.

from disk
LOADING SEQUENCE Load Sequence The function is in progress.

from disk
LOADING STORAGE SET Load data storage The function is in progress.

set from disk
9/03
Messages
Overview
MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE Must be in Program mode to perform function.
MUST BE IN PROGRAM MODE Calibrate AI The controller will not perform the function in the current
OR OFFLINE MODE controller mode.
Calibrate AO
NO MASTER PORT Communications The controller configuration contains at least one

Ports display Modbus slave block, but neither the RS-232 nor the RS-
485 port is set up as a Modbus Master port.Select
Modbus Master protocol for either the RS-232 or the
RS-485 port.
OI COMMUNICATION FAILURE Startup of OI Check cable.

THE OPERATOR STATION
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH
THE CONTROLLER FILE.
PLEASE CHECK THE CABLE
WHICH CONNECTS THE
OPER. STATION AND THE
CONTROLLER FILE.
OPERATION FAILED Disk operation Configuration load failed. Retry function. If message
recurs, write down message along with version and
LOAD FAILED table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.
VERSION x TABLE y
OPERATION FAILED Disk operation Configuration store failed. Retry function. If message
recurs, write down message along with version and
STORE FAILED table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.
VERSION x TABLE y
OPERATION FAILED BEZEL Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the front
OPEN bezel was opened.
OPERATION FAILED DEVICE Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the disk,
ERROR the drive, or the drive interface is faulty.
OPERATION FAILED ERROR Load controller The file content check failed. Retry function. If message
IN FILE RECORD DATA configuration from recurs, write down message along with version and
VERSION x TABLE y disk table numbers and contact Honeywell technical support.
OPERATION FAILED FILE Load controller The file failed the data integrity check. Retry function. If
VERIFY FAILED VERSION x configuration from message recurs, write down message along with
TABLE y disk version and table numbers and contact Honeywell
technical support.
OPERATION FAILED FILE Load controller The file version is incompatible with the controller. Retry
VERSION IS INCORRECT configuration from function. If message recurs, write down message along
VERSION x TABLE y disk with version and table numbers and contact Honeywell
technical support.
OPERATION FAILED MUST BE Load controller The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM
IN PROGRAM MODE VERSION configuration from mode. Retry function. If message recurs, write down
x TABLE y disk message along with version and table numbers and
contact Honeywell technical support.
OPERATION FAILED NOT Load .DSS file The function requires the controller to be in PROGRAM
ALLOWED IN CURRENT MODE from disk or OFFLINE mode.
9/03
Messages
Overview
OPERATION FAILED Load controller The end of file mark was encountered before it was
UNEXPECTED END OF FILE configuration from expected. Retry function. If message recurs, write down
VERSION x TABLE y disk message along with version and table numbers and
contact Honeywell technical support.
OPERATION FAILED WRITE Disk operation The requested disk operation failed because the disk
PROTECTED was write protected.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE Setting time and Pressing enter will write the data to the controller.
CHANGES date Pressing escape will leave without writing the data to
the controller.
PROCESSOR EXCEP Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.

PROCESSOR RESET Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.
QUEUE READ FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.
RAMP R/W ERROR Edit Ramp block The request to read or write Ramp block data to the
data controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.
REQUEST FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.

RESPONSE FAIL Status line 1. Cycle OI power off and on.
SAVE IS NOT PERMITTED SP Programmer, The SAVE feature has been disabled via the HC
SP Scheduler, Designer configuration software.
Sequencer
SEQ R/W ERROR Edit Sequencer The request to read or write step data to the controller
steps failed. Try to edit the segment again.
9/03
Messages
Overview
SET TIME AND DATE Data Storage Disk Go to the Unit Setup display and set the date to the
Initialization present year. Data storage cannot be started if the date
is less than Jan1, 1980.
SPP R/W ERROR Edit Setpoint The request to read or write SPP segment data to the
Programmer controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.
segments
SPS R/W ERROR Edit Setpoint The request to read or write SPS segment data to the
Scheduler controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.
segments
STAGE R/W ERROR Edit Stage block The request to read or write Stage block data to the
controller failed. Try to edit the segment again.
STORAGE FAILURE Status line 1. Check for bad floppy disk.

2. Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive.
3. Check seating of floppy cables.
4. Replace CPU.
STORAGE FULL Status line The data storage RAM buffer is full. Data is
accumulating in this internal buffer (temporary storage)
because it is unable to store the data on the floppy disk.
Possible reasons include:
Disk is full and storage is programmed as non-

rollover.
There is no disk in the drive.
The disk is write-protected.
The disk is not current (see DSK NOT CURRENT).
The front bezel is open.
The message will disappear when the condition is

corrected, or if data storage is disabled (turned off).
STORE COMPLETE Store file to disk The function successfully completed.
STORING CONFIG xx% Store controller The function is in progress.

WAIT configuration to
disk
STORING PROFILE Store Profile to The function is in progress.

disk
STORING RECIPE Store Recipe to The function is in progress.

disk
STORING SCHEDULE Store Schedule to The function is in progress.

disk
STORING SEQUENCE Store Sequence to The function is in progress.

disk
STORING STORAGE SET Store data storage The function is in progress.

set to disk
9/03
Messages
Overview
TASK ERROR Status line A software function (task) on the OI encountered a non-
recoverable error.
1. Cycle power off/on.
2. Do an Operator Cold Start (page 19)
TASK INIT FAIL Status line A software function (task) on the OI failed in its start-up
initialization..
TEST COMPLETE Disk Read/Write The test successfully completed.
Self-Test
TEST FAILED Disk Read/Write The test failed.
Self-Test
UPDATING DISK Status line Storage data is being written from RAM to the storage
disk.
WAIT Edit Recipe A write transaction with the controller is in progress.
Set Security
WAIT READING DATA Select Recipe A read transaction with the controller is in progress.
WARNING FILENAME Store file to disk The selected file name already exists on the disk.
ALREADY EXISTS PRESS Continuing will overwrite the file found on the disk.
ENTER TO OVERWRITE
PRESS ESC TO ABORT
WARNING INITIALIZATION Data Storage disk Continuing will erase all data from the disk and initialize
WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING initialization the disk for the current storage set.
DISK FILES AND DATA PRESS
ENTER TO INIT PRESS ESC
TO ABORT
WARNING THE CONTROLLER Setting controller Changing the controller mode can result in its physical
OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN RUN mode outputs being activated (RUN) or disabled (OFFLINE or
MODE, HELD IN OFFLINE PROGRAM).
MODE AND DE-ENERGIZED IN
PROGRAM MODE.
WARNING THE CONTROLLER Calibrate AI and Change program mode to Off-line or Program
OUTPUTS ARE ACTIVE IN THE AO
RUN MODE, HELD IN OFF-LINE
MODE, AND DE-ENERGIZED IN
PROGRAM MODE.
WARNING THIS TIME CHANGE Setting time and Proceeding to set the time/date backward will result in
WILL ERASE TREND DISPLAY date back the trend data being overwritten with new data. It will
DATA AND FLUSH STORAGE also force storage buffers to be written to disk and the
DATA TO DISK PRESS ENTER storage disk to be closed out (marked full).
TO SAVE PRESS MENU TO
ABORT
WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL Format Disk Continuing will erase the contents of the disk.
ERASE ALL EXISTING DISK
FILES AND DATA PRESS
ENTER TO BEGIN PRESS ESC
TO ABORT
9/03
Messages
Overview
WARNING THIS UTILITY WILL Load data storage Continuing will overwrite the data storage set currently
OVERWRITE THE EXISTING set from disk loaded in the controller.
STORAGE SETTING. PRESS
ENTER TO LOAD PRESS ESC
TO ABORT
WATCHDOG ERROR Status line A watchdog-timer reset occurred because of a software
or hardware failure. If the message recurs, contact
Honeywell technical support.
WRITE-PROTECTED Status line The disk in the drive has its write-protected tab set to
Disk operation the protect position.
9/03
Messages
Overview
9/03
Appendix
Appendix
Security Bypass Procedure

Overview
Your instrument has a security bypass code which allows you to enter secured areas of the product. Use this
bypass code if you have forgotten or lost the Engineer and/or Operator security code.
Bypass procedure
Step Action
1 When you are prompted for the engineer or operator security code, use Increment and
Decrement keys to select the bypass code 783.
2 With 783 displayed, press the Display 5 key (under the display) to display the forgotten
engineer or operator code.
3 To return to the previous menu without entering the secured area, press Escape. To enter the
secured area, press Enter.
ATTENTION
Remove this page for security.
9/03
Appendix
9/03
Index
network port, 166
A RS-485 OI port, 165
view host connections, 167
Alarm view network peer connections, 168
acknowledge, 133 view network peer statistics, 169
auto acknowledge defined, 133 Configuration
defined, 131 load, 211
detail, 134 store, 214
indication, 131 Controller Diagnostics, 137
investigating, 131 controller modes, 34
manual acknowledge defined, 133 Controller status, 154
Alarm Group, 133
Alarm Summary, 132
D
Alarms/Events/Diagnostics
Controller Diagnostics, 137 Data storage
Panel Diagnostic Log, 148 calculate disk capacity, 220
Alternator, 249 controls, 231
Analog input summary, 125 enabling, 225
Analog output summary, 126 file name conventions, 232
architecture initialize, 232
components, 3 intervals, 223
AT keyboard, 21, 22, 23 load settings, 233
Auto/Manual modes, 223
switching loop mode, 25, 107 operation, 228
auto/manual bias, 124 overview, 219
Autotuning Output Low Limit Value, 115 start new storage settings, 235
store settings, 236
B view settings, 234
view status, 229
Bar Graph displays, 258 Date
bias setting, 156
auto/manual, 124 Diagnostic
ratio, 112 communications, 149
Brightness configuration port, 150
adjusting, 199 controller, 137
expansion I/O port, 152
C I/O, 141
Calibrate AI, 178 network port, 151
cold junction, 182 OI port, 150
example, 181 panel log, 148
example of CJ calibration, 183 types, 136
set controller mode, 179 Digital input summary, 126
Calibrate AO, 185 Digital output summary, 127
Calibrate Motor, 190 Disk
Calibration format, 215
restore to AI factory, 184 Disk File
restore to AO initial, 189 list, 202
restore to CJ factory, 185 Disk Files
Carbon loop, 113 data storage naming convention, 232
cold start, 19 file types, 202
Cold Start Disk Utilities, 201
defined, 155, 216 Display
Communications, 161 adjust brightness, 199
expansion I/O port, 172 areas defined, 33
user-assignable, 37
9/03
Index
Display Group keys control setup, 112

relabeling, 31 high output limiting, 116
limits, 115
E Menu, 108
modes, 105, 117
error messages, 267 Multiloop faceplate display, 120
Escape, 25 setup, 108
Event summary, 135 trend, 109
Events tune constants, 111, 123
Setpoint schedule. See Setpoint schedule Loop capacity, 154
Loop output
F changing, 26, 106
F1-F4 buttons, 239, 240, 241
File Name Selection, 175 M
Files Main menu, 41
customizing available filenames, 175 tree, 42
firmware Maintenance, 265
revision number, 237 Messages from system, 267
Floating Point Big Endian, 166 mode
Floating Point Little Endian, 166 controller modes defined, 155
Format Disk, 215 Mode
Four Selector Switch, 240, 241 setting, 154, 216
modes of operation, 34
H Mounting, 7, 14
H indicator, 34
Hand/Off/Auto Switch, 243 O
Help, 263 Overview display, 262
High output limiting. See Loop
HOA display, 243 P
I Panel display
interacting with, 259
I/O Diagnostics, 141 meter, 261
Ignore changes to a number multi-point, 260, 261
how to, 25 single, 259
part number
K of operator interface, 237
Keys parts
Tasks using standard keys, 24 replacement, 265
Keys 1 - 8 PID
displays accessed, 36 high output limiting, 116
power supply, 15
L Profile
load/store, 203
Labeling keys, 31 Pushbuttons, 239
Language, 160
log off/log on, 237 R
Log scale trending, 255
Loop Ramp display, 246
1 loop numeric, 121 Recipe
1 loop w/loop trend display, 122 load, 47
alarm setpoints, 114 load/store, 209
auto/manual bias, 124 Recipes, 46
autotune, 110 replacement parts, 265
carbon, 113 revision number
control, 119 firmware, 237
9/03
Index
S load, 84, 102

load from disk, 205
S indicator, 34
operate menu, 82, 101
Security, 156 operation, 78, 83
how to access secured area, 157 overview, 67
Sequence
popup menu, 82, 101
load from disk, 207 save, 74, 82, 101
store to disk, 207 setup, 68, 90
Sequencer operation, 99, 100
states, 78, 80
edit steps/edit step details, 98, 104 states vs. actions, 83
View/edit, 103 store to disk, 205
Sequencers, 89
view auxiliary setpoints, 82
edit, 91 view details, 87
edit step details, 93 view events, 82, 86
edit steps, 92
Site preparation, 7
select state, 96 Specifications, 5
setup, 90 Stage, 244
view outputs, 95
Standard Keys
view step details, 94 names and functions, 23
Set language, 160 status line, 33
setpoint
switch, 112
Setpoint T
switch, 119 Testing
Setpoint program disk read/write, 177
auxiliary start value, 65 display, 177
change state, 57 keypad, 177
clear program, 57, 60 Time
edit, 51 setting, 156
edit segments, 53, 57, 60, 65 Trend, 254
elapsed time, 60 detail, 256
fast forward, 52 hold, 256
load, 62 log scale, 255
operate menu, 60 popup menu, 256
operation, 55 scroll, 256
overview, 48 scrolling, 28
popup menu, 60 zoom, 256
PV#2 through PV#4, 60
save, 54, 57, 60 U
setup, 49
states, 56, 58 Unit Setup, 153
states vs. actions, 61
time remaining, 60 V
view events, 60, 61 Variable summary, 128
Setpoint schedule
clear from scheduler, 82, 101 W
defined, 67
edit, 69 Warm Start
edit guarantee hold, 73 defined, 155, 216
edit guarantee hold limits, 76 Wiring, 15
edit segment events, 72
edit segments, 70, 82, 88 Z
edit setpoints, 71, 88
Z indicator, 34
9/03
Index
9/03
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor,
contact one of the offices below.
ICELAND REPUBLIC OF SPAIN
CANADA HONEYWELL IRELAND HONEYWELL S.A
HONEYWELL LIMITED Hataekni .hf HONEYWELL Factory
ARGENTINA Unit 1
HONEYWELL S.A.I.C. THE HONEYWELL Armuli 26 Josefa Valcarcel, 24
CENTRE PO Box 8336 Robinhood Business 28027 MADRID
BELGRANO 1156 300 Yorkland Blvd. Park
BUENOS AIRES 128 reykjavik SPAIN
NORTH YORK, Iceland Robinhood Road Tel. : 34 91 31 3 61 00
ARGENTINA ONTARIO DUBLIN 22
Tel : 354 588 5000
Tel. : 54 1 383 9290 M2J 1S1 Republic of Ireland SWEDEN
CANADA Tel. : 353 1 4565944
ASIA PACIFIC ITALY HONEYWELL A.B.
Tel.: 800 461 0013
HONEYWELL S.p.A. S-127 86 Skarholmen
HONEYWELL ASIA Fax:: 416 502 5001 REPUBLIC OF
PACIFIC Inc. Via P. Gobetti, 2/b STOCKHOLM
SINGAPORE
Room 3213-3225 20063 Cernusco Sul SWEDEN
CZECH HONEYWELL PTE LTD
Naviglio Tel. : 46 8 775 55 00
Sun Kung Kai Centre REPUBLIC BLOCK 750E CHAI
N 30 Harbour Road ITALY
HONEYWELL, CHEE ROAD
WANCHAI Spol.s.r.o. Tel. : 39 02 92146 1 SWITZERLAND
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.
HONG KONG Budejovicka 1 HONEYWELL A.G.
PARK
Tel. : 852 829 82 98 140 21 Prague 4 MEXICO Hertistrasse 2
1646 SINGAPORE
Czech Republic HONEYWELL S.A. DE 8304 WALLISELLEN
REP. OF SINGAPORE
Tel. : 42 2 6112 3434 CV SWITZERLAND
AUSTRALIA Tel. : 65 2490 100
HONEYWELL LIMITED AV. CONSTITUYENTES Tel. : 41 1 831 02 71
5 Thomas Holt Drive DENMARK 900
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH
HONEYWELL A/S COL. LOMAS ALTAS AFRICA TURKEY
North Ryde Sydney
NSW AUSTRALIA 2113 Automatikvej 1 11950 MEXICO CITY HONEYWELL HONEYWELL
Tel. : 61 2 353 7000 DK 2860 Soeborg MEXICO Southern Africa Otomasyon ve Kontrol
DENMARK Tel : 52 5 259 1966 PO BOX 138 Sistemlen San ve Tic
AUSTRIA
Tel. : 45 39 55 56 58 Milnerton 7435 A.S.
HONEYWELL THE NETHERLANDS REPUBLIC OF SOUTH (Honeywell Turkey A.S.)
AUSTRIA FINLAND HONEYWELL BV AFRICA Emirhan Cad No 144
G.m.b.H. HONEYWELL OY Laaderhoogtweg 18 Tel. : 27 11 805 12 01 Barbaros Plaza C. Blok
Handelskai 388 Ruukintie 8 1101 EA AMSTERDAM Kat 18
A1020 VIENNA FIN-02320 ESPOO 32 ZO ROMANIA Dikilitas 80700 Istanbul
AUSTRIA FINLAND THE NETHERLANDS HONEYWELL Office TURKEY
Tel. : 43 1 727 800 Tel. : 358 0 3480101 Tel : 31 20 56 56 911 Bucharest Tel : 90-212 258 18 30
147 Aurel Vlaicu Str.,
BELGIUM FRANCE NORWAY Sc.Z., UNITED KINGDOM
HONEYWELL S.A. HONEYWELL S.A. HONEYWELL A/S Apt 61/62 HONEYWELL
3 Avenue de Bourget Btiment le Mercury Askerveien 61 R-72921 Bucharest Unit 1,2 &4 Zodiac
B-1140 BRUSSELS PO Box 263 House
Parc Technologique de ROMANIA
BELGIUM St N-1371 ASKER Calleva Park
Tel : 40-1 211 00 76/
Tel. : 32 2 728 27 11 Aubin NORWAY Aldermaston
211 79
Route de lOrme Tel. : 47 66 76 20 00 Berkshire RG7 8HW
BRAZIL (CD 128) UNITED KINGDOM
RUSSIA
HONEYWELL DO 91190 SAINT-AUBIN POLAND Tel : 44 118 906 2600
HONEYWELL INC
BRAZIL FRANCE HONEYWELL Sp.z.o.o 4 th Floor Administrative
AND CIA Tel. from France: UI Domainewksa 41 U.S.A.
Builiding of AO
Rua Jose Alves Da 01 60 19 80 00 02-672 WARSAW "Luzhniki" HONEYWELL INC.
Chunha From other countries: POLAND Management INDUSTRIAL
Lima 172 PROCESS CONTROLS
33 1 60 19 80 00 Tel. : 48 22 606 09 00 24 Luzhniki
BUTANTA 1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE
119048 Moscow
05360.050 SAO PAULO PA 19034-3260
GERMANY PORTUGAL RUSSIA
SP FT. WASHINGTON
HONEYWELL AG HONEYWELL Tel : 7 095 796 98 00/01
BRAZIL U.S.A.
Kaiserleistrasse 39 PORTUGAL LDA
Tel. : 55 11 819 3755 Tel. : 1-800-343-0228
D-63067 OFFENBACH Edificio Suecia II SLOVAKIA
GERMANY Av. do Forte nr 3 - Piso HONEYWELL Ltd
BULGARIA 3 VENEZUELA
Tel. : 49 69 80 64444 Mlynske nivy 73
HONEYWELL EOOD 2795 CARNAXIDE HONEYWELL CA
PO Box 75
14, Iskarsko Chausse PORTUGAL APARTADO 61314
HUNGARY 820 07 BRATISLAVA 27
POB 79 Tel. : 351 1 424 50 00 1060 CARACAS
HONEYWELL Kft SLOVAKIA
BG- 1592 Sofia VENEZUELA
Gogol u 13 Tel. : 421 7 52 47 400/
BULGARIA Tel. : 58 2 239 0211
H-1133 BUDAPEST 425
Tel : 359-791512/ HUNGARY
794027/ 792198 Tel. : 36 1 451 43 00
Sales and Service
9/03
Honeywell
1100 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
51-52-25-108 Rev.5 0903 Printed in USA www.honeywell.com/imc/

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface

For use with HC900 Hybrid Controller

Industrial Measurement and Control

Copyright 2003 by Honeywell

Industrial Measurement and Control

HC900, 559 and 1042 are U.S. registered trademarks of Honeywell

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

ii 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

Document Title Doc ID

HC900 Controller Installation and User Guide 51-52-25-107

Hybrid Control Designer User Guide 51-52-25-110

Hybrid Control Designer Function Block Reference Guide 51-52-25-109

HC900 Hybrid Controller Communications User Guide 51-52-25-111

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Industrial Measurement and Control http://content.honeywell.com/imc/

Organization Phone Number

United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which,

This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if

This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation

This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for

Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment

iv 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

Overview of Architecture ......................................................................... 3

Keys and Displays Overview................................................................. 21

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide v

Main Menu ............................................................................................ 41

Setpoint Programmers .......................................................................... 48

Setpoint Scheduler ................................................................................ 67

vi 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

Save schedule ............................................................................................................74

Loops .................................................................................................. 105

Common Loop Tasks ...............................................................................................106

Summary Displays .............................................................................. 125

Alarms ................................................................................................. 131

Events ................................................................................................. 135

Unit Setup ........................................................................................... 153

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide ix

Modbus Slave Details display ............................................................................................173

Disk Utilities......................................................................................... 201

x 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

Load configuration ....................................................................................................211

Data Storage ....................................................................................... 219

Log Off/Log On.................................................................................... 237

Other Operating Displays .................................................................... 239

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xi

Monitoring Displays ............................................................................. 253

Appendix ............................................................................................. 277

Index ................................................................................................... 279

Sales and Service ............................................................................... 283

Table 54 Loop modes ...............................................................................................................................................105

Table 109 Self tests details .......................................................................................................................................177

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide xv

Table 164 Messages..................................................................................................................................................267

Figure 52 Panel diagnostic log .................................................................................................................................148

Figure 1 559-T12 operator interface Figure 2 559-T4 operator interface

Figure 3 1042 operator interface

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide 1

Typical readers of this guide

What you can do with the OI

2 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide Revision 5

Revision 5 559 and 1042 Series Operator Interface User Guide 3

Hybrid Control Designer